Chevrolet 2002 TrailBlazer Owner`s manual

2002 Chevrolet TrailBlazer
Owner's Manual
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number C2238 A First Edition
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 2000
All Rights Reserved
i
Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 1
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts
Air Bag Systems
Restraint Systems for Children
Features and Controls
Section 2
ii
Windows
Keys and Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Liftgate/Liftglass
Automatic Transmission
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers
Cruise Control
Exterior and Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Luggage Carrier
Accessory Power Outlets
OnStar® System (If Equipped)
Sunroof (Option)
HomeLink® Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section 3
Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock
Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature
Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Your Driving and the Road
Section 4
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Off-Road Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Problems on the Road
Section 5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck
iii
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Section 6
Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Brakes
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Maintenance Schedule
Section 7
iv
Scheduled Maintenance
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Section 8
Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications
Index
Section 9
In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide
v
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name TRAILBLAZER are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will
be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so the new owner can use it.
vi
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Safety Warnings and Symbols
4-Door Utility
About Driving Your Vehicle
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident. Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and
“off-road” driving guidelines in this manual.
(See “Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle” and
“Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle” in the Index.)
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do
this, it will help you learn about the features and controls
for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures
and words work together to explain things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
vii
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could damage
your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
viii
Your vehicle may be equipped with components and
labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on
your vehicle, are shown along with the text describing
the operation or information relating to a specific
component, control, message, gage or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the index:
D
D
D
D
“Engine Compartment Overview”
“Instrument Panel”
“Comfort Controls”
“Audio Systems”
Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
Here are some examples of symbols you may find on
your vehicle:
ix
Service Station Guide
Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6
Cooling System
See Section 5
For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood
Tire Pressure
See Section 6
Spare Tire Pressure
See Section 6
See Section 6
Hood Release
See Section 6
Battery
See Section 6
Engine Oil Dipstick
See Section 6
Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6
Fuel
Use unleaded only.
See Section 6
for octane ratings.
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-9
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-21
1-22
1-22
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag Systems
1-31
1-34
1-36
1-40
1-54
1-57
1-57
1-57
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Children
Restraint Systems for Children
Older Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the manual and power
seats -- how to adjust them, and also about the reclining
front seatbacks, memory seats, lumbar adjustments and
heated seats.
Power Seats (If Equipped)
If you have this feature,
the power seat controls are
located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions.
Manual Front Seat
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
D Move the front of the seat control up or down to
adjust the front portion of the cushion.
D Move the rear of the seat control up or down to
adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
Pull up on the lever located under the front of the
manual seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you
want it and release the lever. Then try to move the
seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-2
D Lift up or push down on the center of the seat control
to move the entire seat up or down.
D To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the seat
control forward or rearward.
D To recline the seatback, press the vertical control
rearward. To raise the seatback, press the vertical
control forward.
Manual Lumbar Control
This control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Four-Way Power Lumbar Control
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, the driver’s and
passenger’s seatback
lumbar support can be
adjusted four ways by
moving a single control
located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar
support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. To move the lumbar up or down,
hold the control up or down.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
Memory Seat (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature the controls are
located on the driver’s door,
and are used to program and
recall memory settings for
the driver’s seating and
outside mirror positions.
Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatback recliner
and lumbar) and both of the outside mirrors to the
desired position. Then press and hold button 1
(for driver 1) for three seconds. A chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored.
1-4
A second mirror and seating position can be
programmed by repeating the procedure with a
second driver and pressing button 2 for three seconds.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), the memory position will
be recalled. Each time a memory button is pressed,
a single chime will sound.
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’s seat
and mirror positions will be recalled if programmed to
do so through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
The numbers on the back of the transmitters, 1 or 2,
correspond to the numbers on the memory controls.
The seat and mirror positions can also be recalled by
placing the key in the ignition if programmed to do
so through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
any time, press one of the power seat controls or
memory buttons.
Two personalized exit positions can be set by first
recalling the driver’s position (by pressing 1 or 2), then
positioning the seat in the desired exit position for that
driver. Then press and hold the button with the exit
symbol for three seconds. A chime will sound to let you
know that the position has been stored. With the vehicle
in PARK (P), the exit position for that driver can be
recalled by pressing the exit button. The mirrors,
power lumbar and recline positions will not be stored
or recalled for the exit positions.
Programming for automatic seat and mirror movement
can be done through the Driver Information Center
(DIC). You can choose to either select or not select
automatic seat and mirror movement by using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, by placing your
key in the ignition, or when exiting the vehicle. For
programming information, see “Vehicle Programming
and Personalization Features” in the Index.
Heated Front Seats (Option)
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons used to control this
feature are located on the
front door armrests. The
engine must be running
for the heated seat feature
to work.
The horizontal button with the heated seat symbol
is used to control the temperature settings high,
medium and low. Press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings and to turn the heated seat off. An
indicator light will glow beside the temperature selected.
The low setting warms the seatback and cushion until
the seat temperature is near body temperature. The
medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be
able to feel heat in about two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. Press the vertical button
again to heat the whole seat.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
1-5
Reclining Front Seatbacks
If your vehicle has a manual recliner, lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat and push the
seatback rearward to recline the seatback. To return the
seatback to the normal position, lift the lever without
pushing rearward on the seatback and the seatback
will move forward.
If your vehicle has power seat controls, the vertical
power seat control described earlier allows the seatback
to recline.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
The head restraints lock into place when raised.
To release the head restraint and lower it, press the
tab located on the top of the seatback.
1-7
Rear Seats
Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold
the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
The rear seatback handles
are located on the outboard
side of the rear seatbacks.
Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the handle.
The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way
when the seatback is folded down.
Pull up on the tab located where the seat cushion meets
the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and out of
the way. This will allow the seatback to fold flat and
increase the cargo area.
1-8
To raise the seatbacks, lift up the seatbacks and push
on them until they lock into the upright position.
Push and pull on the seatbacks to make sure that they
are latched securely. Then fold the bottom seat cushion
back into place.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
To return the head restraint to the upright position, reach
behind the seat and pull the restraint up until it locks
into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to make
sure that it is latched securely.
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-9
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-10
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-12
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much
greater if you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-14
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-15
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect
the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly,
it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in
this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags -- a frontal air bag
for the driver, another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and
another side impact air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are designed to work with safety belts but
don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-22
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in moderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at
all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants,
frontal air bags may provide less protection in
frontal crashes than more forceful air bags
have provided in the past. The side impact air
bags for the driver and right front passenger
are designed to inflate only in moderate to
severe crashes where something hits the side
of your vehicle. They aren’t designed to inflate
in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly -- whether or not there’s an air bag
for that person.
CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for air bag inflation before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door.
1-23
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this
manual called “Children.”
1-24
There is an air bag
readiness light on
the instrument panel,
which shows the
air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-25
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-26
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
When should an air bag inflate?
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other air bag
covering. Don’t let seat covers block the inflation
path of a side impact air bag.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.”
If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t
move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph
(14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
1-27
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air
bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
1-28
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal
air bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you
in many types of collisions, including frontal or near
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only
in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions
for the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air
bags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions
for the driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact
air bags.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and
right front passenger’s side impact air bags -- will be
hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into
contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using
the door lock and interior lamp controls.
1-29
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for
your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s
safety belt usage at deployment. The module also
records speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
1-30
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the
air bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Rear Seat Passengers
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
CAUTION:
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-31
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All three rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here’s how to wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender”
at the end of this section. Make sure the release button
on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to
unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-32
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-33
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When
installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better
positions the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each of the outside passenger
positions in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be
installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install
a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1-34
1. Slide the guide off
of its storage clip
located between
the interior body
and the seatback.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt
into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
1-35
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Infants and Young Children
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use
the vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Passenger Positions” earlier
in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
1-36
CAUTION: (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h),
a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-37
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-38
CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed
across the strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always should be
secured in appropriate infant restraints.
CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip
bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-39
Restraint Systems for Children
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.
1-40
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-41
Q:
A:
How do child restraints work?
A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce
the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps.
1-42
A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are
attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position
including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat,
a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat.
Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating air bag. Always
secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat outside position.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat outside position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child
is in it.
1-43
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored.
In the United States, some child restraints also have a top
strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should
be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed. Raise the head restraint
and route the top strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap
when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-44
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle may have the LATCH system. If it does,
you’ll find anchors (A) in the rear outside seat positions.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH
system will have two metal tabs where the seat cushion
meets the seatback.
Anchor brackets for the rear seat positions are located
on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle. Do not
use the rear tie-down brackets near the liftgate for top
strap tethers.
1-45
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C),
or a rear-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B), as shown here.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
1-46
CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect a child sitting there. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint
is properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position” in the Index for
information on how to secure a child restraint in
your vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belts.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want to
use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the back
of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See “Top Strap” in the
Index. Tighten the top strap according to the child
restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect
the anchor points.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-48
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If
you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-49
Center Seat Position
Don’t use child restraints in this position.
The restraints won’t work properly.
1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-51
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-52
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-53
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a lap-shoulder
belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the
face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-54
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In a crash, the two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured. A belt must
be used by only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that
in a crash the child’s upper body would have the
restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting
in a rear seat outside position, see “Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
1-55
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way,
in a crash the child might slide under the belt.
The belt’s force would then be applied right on
the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious
or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-56
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach
it to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system
earlier in this section.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-57
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-10
2-13
2-14
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-26
2-30
2-31
2-33
2-33
2-34
Windows
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Liftgate/Liftglass
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine
2- Exhaust
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-36
2-44
2-47
2-49
2-56
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-66
2-67
2-70
2-72
2-74
2-89
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Locking Rear Axle
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Accessory Power Outlets
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
Sunroof (Option)
HomeLinkR Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(If Equipped)
2-1
Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-2
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
The driver’s and front passenger’s window switches
have an express-down feature that allows you to lower
the window without holding the switch down. Press the
bottom of the driver’s window switch down briefly to
activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap the switch
to open the window slightly. The express-down feature
can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top of
the switch.
Lockout Switch
Your vehicle has a lockout feature to prevent passengers
from operating the power windows. A small light in the
lockout switch will come on to show that the switch has
been activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
to normal operation.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,
the switches operate the windows when the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. (See “Retained Accessory
Power” in the Index.) The driver’s door has a switch for
each of the passenger’s windows as well.
Press the bottom of the switch to lower the window.
Press the top of the switch to raise the window.
2-3
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-4
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door locks. It
will fit with either side up.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have
new ones made easily using this number. Your selling
dealer should also have this number.
2-5
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
D Passengers -- especially children -- can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
D Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
D Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-6
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the remote keyless entry system.
You can use your key to unlock your door from
the outside.
You can lock or unlock the door from the inside by
sliding the manual lever forward or rearward. When the
door is unlocked, you can see a red area on the lever.
The manual lever on each rear door works only that
door’s lock.
Programmable Locking Feature
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
The following is the list of available
programming options:
D Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is
shifted into gear.
D Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
D Mode 3: No automatic door locking.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
Remove the ignition key and press the lock symbol to
lock all of the doors at once. To unlock the doors, press
the other side of the switch.
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission is
shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the three programming options
listed above before entering the program mode.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
To enter the program mode you need to do
the following:
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the
following method.
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold it
there while you perform the next step.
2-7
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, you
will hear the lock switch lock and unlock, the horn
will chirp twice, and a 30 second program timer
will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the three programming options
listed above, and press the lock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the lock options.
You will have 30 seconds to begin programming.
If you exceed the 30 second limit, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will
chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program
mode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning
with Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not
be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-8
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available
programming options:
D Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the
transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
D Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
D Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
D Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock the driver’s door once the transmission
is shifted to PARK (P). The following instructions detail
how to program your door locks differently than the
factory setting. Choose one of the four programming
options listed above before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do
the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then,
with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, you
will hear the lock switch lock and unlock, the horn
will chirp twice, and a 30 second program timer
will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed above, and press the unlock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking
options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30 second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the
horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left
the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning
the ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock
and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not
be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
Rear Door Security Locks
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so they
can’t be opened from the inside by passengers. To use
one of these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2-9
2. You will find a security
lock lever located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. Move the lever
down to engage the
safety lock. Move the
lever up to disengage
the safety lock.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock and
then the driver’s door will unlock.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry System
(If Equipped)
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door when the security lock is on, unlock
the door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Prevention
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open to
protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
2-10
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Operation
(Unlock): When you
press unlock, the driver’s
door will unlock
automatically, the parking
lamps may flash and the
interior lights will go on.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
see “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the Index.
(Lock): Press lock to lock all the doors. Press lock
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
(Panic): When the button with the horn symbol
on the key transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound
and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the horn
button again, or by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting
the vehicle.
2-11
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Battery Replacement
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a
RFA # BATTERY LOW message when the transmitter
battery is low.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
2-12
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
Liftgate/Liftglass
CAUTION:
1. Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers
of the transmitter housing. Gently pry the
transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+)
side down.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate or liftglass
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal between
the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on panel or bi-level with recirculation off.
That will force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-13
Liftgate Release
Emergency Release for Opening Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate, you may use the power door
locks or the keyless entry system described earlier.
1. Remove the trim plug to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
On some vehicles the liftglass will also unlock when the
liftgate is unlocked. Use the pushbutton on the liftglass
to open it.
2. Use a screwdriver to reach through the access hole in
the trim panel.
If the liftglass does not unlock when you unlock the
liftgate, you have to use your key to unlock the liftglass.
Insert the key into the pushbutton and turn it
counterclockwise. With the key turned press in the
pushbutton to open the liftglass.
The liftgate cannot be opened if the liftglass is opened.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the liftgate.
2-14
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reattach the trim plug.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Key in the Ignition
Parking Lots
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your
ignition key? What if you have to leave something
valuable in your vehicle?
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your ignition and transmission will be locked. Also
remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system,
take the transmitter with you.
D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
2-15
Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
United States
Canada
With this system, the SECURITY light will flash as you
open the door (if your ignition is off).
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY light goes off.
2-16
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the
alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
D If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
D Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by
pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock
a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
PasslockR
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is disabled
and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will
turn off approximately five seconds after the key is
turned to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing
before trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see “Fuses
and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
2-17
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer
for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
2-18
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
Ignition Positions
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (Accessory): This position lets you use things like the
radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off.
NOTICE:
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four
different positions.
A (Lock): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will
only be able to remove the key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
Don’t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY
position for long periods of time. Prolonged
operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY
position could drain the battery and prevent you
from starting your vehicle.
C (Run): This is the position for driving.
D (Start): This position starts the engine.
2-19
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
of your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (option) and
overhead console will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
RUN to LOCK, these features will continue to work for
up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2-20
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. At 15 seconds, the
starter will automatically be disengaged. Wait
about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0_F or -18_C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there. When the
engine starts, let go of the key.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32_F (0_C), use of the coolant heater is
not required.
2-21
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, behind the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
2-22
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start the engine because
your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be
free to roll -- even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply the regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever -- press the button on the shift lever and push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into the
gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in
the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-23
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
CAUTION:
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
NOTICE:
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use the brakes off and on.
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)
when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on
steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
2-24
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold the
vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the transmission. Use
the brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold the
vehicle in position on a hill.
Shift Lock Release
This vehicle is equipped with a shift lock release system.
If your vehicle has a dead battery and you need to
have your vehicle towed, there is a shift lock release
lever that will allow you to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
To access the shift lock release lever, do the following:
1. Press on the sides of the boot around the shift lever
to release the boot.
2. Lift up the boot on the shift lever and you will see an
orange lever.
3. Press the orange lever down and move the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
4. Snap the shift lever boot back in place.
2-25
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You
should use two-wheel drive (2HI) for most normal
driving conditions.
Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped
with the automatic transfer
case, the transfer case knob
is located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel. Use this
knob to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.
NOTICE:
Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the
life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
2-26
You can choose among four driving settings:
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. It also provides the best fuel economy.
A4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
A4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle
senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically
engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in
slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.
4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as
on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive
your vehicle.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and
delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,
and climbing or descending steep hills.
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information.
An indicator light in the knob will show you which
position the transfer case is in. The indicator lights will
come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one
will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator
light will flash while shifting the transfer case. It will
remain illuminated when the shift is complete. If for
some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested
shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
2-27
If the SERVICE 4WD light on the instrument panel
cluster stays on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. See “Service 4WD” in the Index for
further information.
Shifting to 4HI or A4WD
Turn the knob to 4HI or A4WD. This can be done at any
speed and the indicator light will flash while shifting. It
will remain illuminated when the shift is complete.
Shifting to 2HI
Turn the knob to 2HI. This can be done at any speed.
Shifting to 4LO
To shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be running
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to 4LO. You must wait
for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear.
2-28
If you knob to 4LO when your vehicle is in gear
and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds, the
transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, A4WD or 2HI your vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine
running. The preferred method for shifting out
of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to 4HI, A4WD or 2HI.
You must wait for the 4HI, A4WD or 2HI indicator light
to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear.
If the 4HI, A4WD or 2HI knob is turned when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, A4WD
or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but
will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is
moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting to NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL first make sure
the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:
To shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle.
2. Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK (P).
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired shift
position (2HI, 4HI or A4WD).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way past 4LO
and hold it there for a minimum of 10 seconds.
The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will come on.
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
the red light will go out. Shift the transmission lever
to the desired position.
7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second.
6. A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out
of NEUTRAL.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
9. Place the transmission shift lever to PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
2-29
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and pull up on the parking
brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake system
warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you
can press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all the
way down.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your parking brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-30
Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. With four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll -- even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
D Press the button in on the side of the lever.
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
2-31
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. If you have
four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to
roll -- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic
Transfer Case)” in the Index. And, if you leave
the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you (or pressing the button on a console shift
lever). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-32
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission
Operation” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the
gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to LOCK.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-33
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-34
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the fan is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be
free to roll -- even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-35
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
You should adjust the
steering wheel before you
drive. The tilt lever is
located on the driver’s side
of the steering column,
under the turn signal lever.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
D
: Turn and Lane Change Signals
: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
D
D Flash-to-Pass Feature
D
: Windshield Wipers
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
D
D
2-36
: Windshield Washer
: Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they
are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane
change indicators.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.
2-37
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps
to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the
automatic position.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
2-38
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward
you. The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
: Mist
: Off
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to mist. Hold it
there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers will
stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on mist longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the first solid band past the delay settings.
For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings. To stop the
wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Rainsense
t Wipers (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with Rainsense
windshield wipers. When active, these wipers are able to
detect moisture on the windshield and automatically turn
on the wipers.
The moisture sensor is located next to the inside
rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield.
To turn on the Rainsense feature, the wipers must be set
to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity of
the rainsensor. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings
located closer to off on the multifunction lever.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from off to high speed according to the
weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a rainsense
mode even when it is not raining.
NOTICE:
Turn the multifunction lever to off to avoid
wiper damage when going through an automatic
car wash.
2-39
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, press the paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop or
return to your preset speed.
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
This control is located to the
right of the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2. For
steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the wiper
off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
located in the center of the control.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield
washer. If you can wash your windshield but not your
rear window, check your fluid level.
2-40
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you
: Off
| : On
+ : Resume/Accelerate
: Set
D
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
2-41
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
United States
Canada
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster will
illuminate when the cruise control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The accelerator petal will not go down.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on
to resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
2-42
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
D Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
D Step lightly on the brake pedal.
D Move the cruise switch to off, or
D Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
D To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
Erasing Speed Memory
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
2-43
Exterior Lamps
Your exterior lamps knob is
on the driver’s side of your
instrument panel.
Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps
symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as
the headlamps.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to this
symbol to turn off the lamps and put the system in
automatic headlamp mode.
Automatic Headlamp System
Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps
symbol to manually turn on the following:
D
D
D
D
D
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2-44
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top
of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your lights when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather or a
tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be affected when the light
sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than
the delay.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake,
or until you shift out of park.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later
in this section for more information.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s door
is open and your ignition is in LOCK or ACCESSORY.
To turn the tone off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise. In the automatic mode, the headlamps
turn off once the ignition key is in LOCK.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional daytime running lamps are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come
on at reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
D The ignition is on,
D the exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode,
D the light sensor detects daytime light, and
D the transmission is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps
will automatically switch from DRL to the
regular headlamps.
2-45
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, put your
vehicle’s transmission in PARK (P). The DRL will stay
off until you shift out of PARK (P).
The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada.
When necessary, you may turn off the automatic
headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) feature by following the steps below:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Press the dome override button four times within six
seconds. After the fourth press of the button, a chime
will sound informing you that the system is off.
3. To return to the automatic mode, press the dome
override button four times within six seconds (the
chime will sound), or turn the ignition to LOCK and
then to RUN again.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
2-46
Fog Lamps
Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions. Your ignition must be in RUN for your fog
lamps to work.
The fog lamp button is
located on the instrument
panel to the right of the
exterior lamps knob. Press
the button to turn the fog
lamps on. Press the button
again to turn them off. A
light will glow near the
button when the fog lamps
are on.
Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
Interior Lamps
Brightness Control
Press the knob located next
to the exterior lamps knob
to extend and turn it to
make your instrument panel
lights brighter. Turn the
knob all the way up to turn
on the interior lamps. Press
the knob back into its
stored position.
Dome Lamp Override
You can use the dome
override button, located
below the exterior lamps
knob, to set the dome lamps
to come on automatically
when a door is opened, or to
remain off.
To turn the lamps off press the button. The dome lamps
will remain off when a door is open. To return the lamps
to automatic operation, press the button again. The
dome lamps will come on when you open a door. This
will override the illuminated entry feature unless you
use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
Press the dome lamp override button four times to
override the automatic headlamps and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
Illuminated Entry
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated
entry feature.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on if
the dome override button is in the “out” position. When
all the doors are closed, the lamps will stay on for a
short period of time and will then turn off automatically.
If you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the
vehicle, the interior lights will come on for a short time
whether or not the dome override is on.
2-47
Exit Lighting
Dome Lamps
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition to help you see
while exiting the vehicle. With the dome override button
in the “out” position, these lights will stay on for a short
period of time and then will go out.
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
Reading Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps knob, all
the way up to the top detent position. In this position,
the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off.
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,
reading, glove box and underhood lamps if they are left
on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off.
This will keep your battery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
Press the lens on the lamp located above the doors to
turn the reading lamps on and off.
D Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
D turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most circumstances, if they are left on.
If you would like to turn them back on, turn the exterior
lamps knob on.
2-48
Mirrors
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
with Compass and OnStarR(If Equipped)
There are three buttons for the OnStar system. See your
dealer for more information on the system and how to
subscribe to OnStar. See “OnStarR System” in the Index
for more information about the services OnStar provides.
Automatic Dimming Feature
When turned on, an electrochromic mirror automatically
dims to the proper level to minimize glare from any
headlamps behind you after dark.
Your vehicle has an automatic-dimming rearview mirror
with a compass and the OnStar system.
The automatic dimming feature is turned on and off by
pressing the far left button, located on the lower part of
the mirror face, for up to three seconds. A light on the
mirror will be lit when the feature is turned on. It will go
out when the feature is turned off.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays a
maximum of two characters. For example, “NE” is
displayed for north-east.
This is the on/off button.
2-49
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. “CAL” will be
displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
D Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less
until the display shows “CAL,” or
D drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
(This method may take longer to calibrate).
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust
for compass variance. Compass variance is the
difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the map.
2-50
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when “ZONE” is displayed.
The number shown is the current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your zone
number, release the button. After about four seconds,
the mirror will return to the compass and
temperature display, and the new zone number will
be set.
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
with Compass, Temperature and OnStarR
There are three buttons for the OnStar system. See your
dealer for more information on the system and how to
subscribe to OnStar. See “OnStarR System” in the
Index for more information about the services
OnStar provides.
Automatic Dimming Feature
When turned on, an electrochromic mirror automatically
dims to the proper level to minimize glare from any
headlamps behind you after dark.
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass, temperature display and the
OnStar system.
The automatic dimming feature is turned on and off by
pressing the far left button, located on the lower part of
the mirror face, for up to three seconds. A light on the
mirror will be lit when the feature is turned on. It will go
out when the feature is turned off.
Temperature Display
The temperature display is in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The display will show
the temperature in F or C when the compass is on.
Press the on/off button to cycle through F, C, or OFF.
_ _
_ _
This is the on/off button.
2-51
Compass Operation
Compass Variance
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust
for compass variance. Compass variance is the
difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays a
maximum of two characters. For example, “NE” is
displayed for north-east.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. “CAL” will be
displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
D Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less
until the display shows “CAL,” or
D drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
(This method may take longer to calibrate).
2-52
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the map.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your zone
number, release the button. After about four seconds,
the mirror will return to the compass and
temperature display, and the new zone number will
be set.
Outside Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the
side of your vehicle.
Fold the mirrors in before before entering a car wash. To
do this, pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the
mirrors back out when finished.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when “ZONE” is displayed.
The number shown is the current zone number.
2-53
Power Remote Control Mirrors
(If Equipped)
Convex Outside Mirror
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more
from the driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors
The control is located on the driver’s door.
Turn the control to the left or right to choose the mirror;
then press the control to move the mirror in the direction
that you want the mirror to go. To secure the mirror
settings turn the knob back to the center position.
2-54
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
also warms the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside
rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow and
condensation. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the
Index for more information.
Electrochromic Rearview Outside Mirror
with Curb View Assist (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s outside
mirror will adjust for the glare of the headlamps behind
you. See “Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
with Compass and OnStarR” earlier in this section.
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it will
also be capable of performing the curb view assist
mirror function. This feature will cause the passenger’s
and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature may
be useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are
parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
short delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/or driver’s
mirror will return to its original position.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the mirrors
to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory
as the tilt position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center. See “Personalization Features” in
the Index for more information.
2-55
Storage Compartments
Travel Note Recorder (If Equipped)
Glove Box
To open your glove box, pull the handle on the front of
the glove box and lower the door.
Overhead Console
The overhead console
includes sunglasses storage,
a HomeLinkR transmitter
and a travel note recorder
(if equipped).
The overhead console may also contain a travel
note recorder.
To record a message, press the button with the circle on
it and begin speaking. Press the button with the circle on
it again to stop recording.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the
overhead console, press the release button. Then pull the
compartment down.
2-56
You may also press and hold the button with the circle
on it while you are speaking and then let it go when you
are finished.
To play back messages, press the button with the right
arrow on it. Pressing the right arrow button more than
once will return you to previously recorded messages. If
you press and hold this button for more than one second,
all of the recorded messages will be played back.
To delete messages, press the button with the square
on it while the message is playing. If you press and
hold the right arrow button and the circle button at the
same time for a half of a second, all of the messages will
be deleted.
For more information on these components, please see
the Index for that item.
Door Storage
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
You will find a storage compartment on each of the
front doors.
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle to help keep small items, like gloves and light
clothing, in place during sharp turns or quick stops
and starts.
Front Storage Area (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the front lever while lifting the top to open it. You can
store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front
of the compartment.
Your vehicle’s console will be equipped with
cupholders located on the front and rear of the
storage compartment.
The console may also contain one or more of the
following components:
D Rear Seat Audio Controls
D Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets
D Fan Control
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, lift
the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots
for cassettes or compact discs..
The net is not designed to retain these items during
off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side
of the liftgate opening (the label should be in the
upper passenger’s side corner, visible from the rear
of the vehicle).
2. Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs
on the floor.
2-57
Cargo Security Shade (If Equipped)
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to cover
items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
2. Compress one endcap and remove it from the pocket
in the trim panel.
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
located behind the rear seat.
2. Compress the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim panel
and release.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle to
secure it.
2-58
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store it
outside of the vehicle. When you put it back,
always be sure that it is securely reattached.
Cargo Tie Downs
Rear Floor Stowage Lid
There are five cargo tie
downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you to
strap cargo in and keep it
from moving.
CAUTION:
If the rear floor stowage lid isn’t secured
properly, it can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be
injured. Be sure to secure the rear floor stowage
lid properly.
Your vehicle has a rear floor stowage lid located in
the rear cargo area that allows you to put items
underneath it.
To remove the rear floor stowage lid, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
3. Pull the lid rearward to release it from the forward
mounting tabs.
To reinstall the rear floor stowage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.
2-59
Luggage Carrier
CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier -- like paneling, plywood, a mattress, and
so forth -- the wind can catch it as you drive
along. This can cause you to lose control. What
you are carrying could be violently torn off, and
this could cause you or other drivers to have a
collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You
may be able to carry something like this inside.
But, never carry something longer or wider than
the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top of
your vehicle. The luggage carrier has slats and side rails
attached to the roof, sliding crossrails and places to use
for tying things down. These let you load some other
things on top of your vehicle, as long as they are not
wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
2-60
To slide the crossrails to where you want them, pull up
on the lever on each side of the crossrail. This will
release the crossrail and allow you to slide it. When the
crossrail is where you want it, press down on the lever to
lock it into place.
NOTICE:
Loading cargo that weighs more than 220 lbs.
(100 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle.
When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a
proper size and weight, put it on the slats, and
distribute the weight evenly. Then slide the
crossrail up against the rear of the load, to help
keep it from moving. You can then tie it down.
Cargo containers must be loaded on the
crossrails only.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier is
locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The front ashtray is removable and fits into the
front cupholder.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overload, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can pull the visor down. You can
also swing the visor from side-to-side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror.
To remove the front ashtray, pull the covered bin out of
the cupholder.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
2-61
Accessory Power Outlets
With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
Your vehicle has three accessory power outlets. The first
outlet is located to the right of the cigarette lighter on
the instrument panel. The second outlet is located on the
rear of the center console, and the third one is located in
the rear of the vehicle near the liftgate.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet.
Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the
accessory power outlet.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power outlets.
2-62
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damage it or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
NOTICE:
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a
variety of services and provides a hands-free
communication link between you and the OnStar Center.
A service subscription agreement and fee are required in
order to receive OnStar service. Services are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For more information,
call 1-888-ONSTAR-7 (1-888-667-8277).
OnStar Services Button: Press this button once to
contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with
these services. If you are not quickly connected, the
system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures
connection to the center; there is no additional action
required. Press the Call Answer/End button to cancel the
automatic redial.
Emergency Button: In an emergency situation,
press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the
call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and
assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert
the nearest emergency service provider.
Call ANSWER/END Button: Use this button
to answer a call. (If you are receiving a call, the audio
system will mute, and the ring will be heard). Press this
button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the
audio system to its previous settings. This button will
also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally
pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated.
2-63
Volume Control: You can control the volume of the
OnStar System using either the volume control knob
on the radio or using the steering wheel volume control
(if equipped).
Telltale Light: This light will indicate the status of
the system. A solid green light will come on when you
start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on
and is ready to make or receive calls.
If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or
outgoing call is in progress. Press the Call
ANSWER/END button if you notice the light blinking
and you are not on a call.
The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system
malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar button to
attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection is made,
the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make
sure that the system is functioning properly. If you
cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your
dealership as soon as possible for assistance.
2-64
Safety and Security Services
Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment: If an
air bag deploys, a priority emergency signal is
automatically sent to the center. An advisor will locate
your vehicle’s position, try to contact you and assist you
in the situation. If the center is unable to contact you, an
emergency service provider will be contacted.
Stolen Vehicle Tracking: Call the center at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report your
vehicle stolen. The system can then locate and track
your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify the
proper authorities.
Roadside Assistance with Location: For vehicle
breakdowns, press the OnStar button. An advisor will
contact the appropriate help.
Remote Diagnostics: If an instrument panel light comes
on, the center can perform a check of the engine
on-board computer. An advisor can then recommend
what action needs to be taken.
OnStar MED-NET: Med-Net can store your personal
medical history and provide it to emergency personnel if
necessary. (Requires activation and additional fee.)
Remote Door Unlock: To contact the center, call
1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide
your security information. An advisor will send a
command to your vehicle to unlock itself. The advisor
can delay unlocking your vehicle. Remote Door Unlock
is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to
maintain the battery charge.
Vehicle Locator Service: To contact the center, call
1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide your
security information. An advisor will send a command
to your vehicle to sound the horn and/or flash the lamps.
Premium Services (Includes Safety and
Security Services)
Route Support: An advisor can provide directions or
guidance to anywhere you want to go. In addition, they
can help you locate gas stations, rest areas, ATMs,
hospitals, hotels, stores, eateries and more.
Concierge Services: The concierge advisor can obtain
tickets, reservations, or help with vacation/trip planning
and other unique items and services.
Ride Assist: An advisor can locate transportation in the
event that you are unable to drive.
In order to provide you with excellent service, calls with
the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded.
2-65
OnStar System Limitations
Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber
Services Agreement.
OnStar Service is:
D available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska,
Hawaii and Canada;
D available when the vehicle is within the operating
range of a cellular provider;
D subject to limitations caused by atmospheric
conditions, such as severe weather or topographical
conditions, such as mountainous terrain;
D subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.
Global positioning capabilities used to deliver
OnStar service will not be available if satellite signals
are obstructed.
OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is
discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative
if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle
electrical system components are damaged.
2-66
Safety and security services are provided by existing
governmental emergency service providers. OnStar will
use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate
emergency service provider and request assistance but
cannot promise that they will respond to the call in a
timely manner or at all.
Sunroof (Option)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. See
“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
Press and release the back of the button in the overhead
console to open the sunroof. You can press the front of
the button to close the sunroof. Once the sunroof is
closed, press the forward side of the button to open the
sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you
can pull forward to block sun rays.
HomeLinkR Transmitter (If Equipped)
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Decide which one of the three channels (one of the
HomeLink buttons) you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink
through Step 3.
2-67
3. When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink
slowly (this may take up to 30 seconds), hold the
hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from HomeLink and then press and hold the
transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.
Continue to hold both buttons until the indicator
light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly (this may
take up to 90 seconds).
If you have trouble programming HomeLink, make
sure that you have followed the directions exactly as
described and that the battery in the hand-held
transmitter is not weak. If you still cannot program it,
move the hand-held transmitter to the left or right or
forward or backward or flip it upside down. HomeLink
may not work with older garage door openers that do
not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated
attempts, refer to “Training a Garage Door Opener
with Rolling Codes” later in this section or contact the
manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter in
case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink.
Training a Garage Door Opener with a
“Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held
transmitter to HomeLink, see “Programming the
HomeLink Transmitter” listed previously. If you have
completed this programming already, you now need to
train the garage door opener motor head unit to
recognize HomeLink.
1. Find the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit. The exact location and
color will vary by garage door opener brand. If you
have difficulty finding the “Learn” or “Smart”
button, refer to your garage door opener owner’s
manual or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist in
programming the transmitter.
2. Press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit. An indicator light will
begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the
training mode.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to
start Step 3.
2-68
3. Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly
press and release the programmed HomeLink button
three times.
The rolling-code garage door opener should now
recognize HomeLink. You may either use HomeLink or
the hand-held transmitter to open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, contact the
manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
Canadian Programming
Canadian Owners: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting after two seconds. In this case, you should
press and hold the HomeLink button (see Steps 2
and 3 under “Programming the HomeLink Transmitter”)
while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink
is trained.
Operating the HomeLink Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink to default settings, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (approximately 20 seconds). Continue to hold both
buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and
then release both buttons.
Accessories
Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please contact the manufacturer
of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet
at www.homelink.com.
2-69
The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
2-70
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Exterior Lamp Controls
I. Comfort Controls
B. Air Vents
J. Hood Release
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
K. Ashtray
D. Instrument Panel Cluster
L. Shift Lever
E. Ignition Switch
M. Lighter
F. Transfer Case Controls (If Equipped) or
Traction Control Button (If Equipped)
N. Accessory Power Outlet
G. Rear Window Washer/Wiper
P. Glove Box
O. Rear Window Defogger
H. Audio System
2-71
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
2-72
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip odometer button.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. The new one will be set to the
correct millage total of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). For information on how to reset the trip
odometer see “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in
the Index.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in the shaded warning area, or engine damage
will occur.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
2-73
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
2-74
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with the warning lights and
gages. See “Driver Information Center (DIC) in
the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN, a chime will come
on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds,
then it will flash for
about 55 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air
bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
2-75
Charging System Indicator Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
2-76
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition
is on (in RUN), this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when
a large number of electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
2-77
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
2-78
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, it means that your
engine coolant has overheated. If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,
you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn
off the engine as soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon Light in the United States
or Check Engine Light in Canada)
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for
more information.
2-79
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure
that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the
vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
2-80
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or
the replacement of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
CHECK ENGINE light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This
may also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
2-81
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
“Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-82
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is
on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low
oil pressure.
2-83
Change Engine Oil Light
United States
Security Light
Canada
This light is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the CHANGE
ENG OIL light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
will be displayed when the engine is on. For more
information on resetting the system, see “Oil Life
System” in the Index.
United States
Canada
This light will come on briefly when you turn the
key toward START. The light will stay on until the
engine starts.
If the light flashes, the PasslockR system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock”
in the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your dealer.
Also, see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for
additional information regarding the SECURITY light.
2-84
Cruise Control Light (If Equipped)
United States
Canada
The CRUISE light appears whenever you set your cruise
control. See “Cruise Control” in the Index.
Reduced Engine Power
United States
Canada
This light is displayed when a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s performance may occur. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed when the reduced engine
power light is on but acceleration and speed may be
reduced. The performance may be reduced until the next
time you drive your vehicle. If this light stays on, see
your dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair.
This light may also come on if there is a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If this happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
as possible.
2-85
Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light
(If Equipped)
Check Gages Light
United States
United States
This light should come on briefly when you turn on the
ignition, as a check to show you it is working.
The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by
the system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
2-86
Canada
Canada
The CHECK GAGES light will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
Gate Ajar
United States
Fuel Gage
Canada
If this light comes on, your liftgate or liftglass is ajar.
Try closing the liftgate or liftglass again. Never drive
with the liftgate or liftglass even partially open.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
2-87
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Low Fuel Light
D At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
D The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
United States
Canada
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly
when you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See “Fuel” in
the Index.
2-88
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(If Equipped)
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster above the steering wheel. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy and
personalization features.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the current driver and the
information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge any current warning or service messages.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed
by pressing the four buttons on the DIC. These buttons
are trip information, fuel information, personalization
and select. The button functions are detailed in
the following.
Trip Information Button
A. Trip Information: This button will display the
odometer, trip odometer and the timer.
B. Fuel Information: This button will display the
current range, average fuel economy, instant fuel
economy and engine oil life.
C. Personalization: This button will change personal
options available on your vehicle.
D. Select: This button resets certain functions and turns
off or acknowledges messages on the DIC.
Use the trip information button to scroll through the
odometer, TRIP A, TRIP B and TIMER.
2-89
Odometer
Timer
Press the trip information button until the odometer
appears on the display. This shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument cluster
with the vehicle off will also display the odometer.
The DIC can be used as a stopwatch. Press the select
button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer. The
display will show the amount of time that has passed
since the timer was last reset (not including time the
ignition is off). Time will continue to be counted as long
as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the
display will roll back to zero.
Trip A and Trip B
Press the trip information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
is displayed. This shows the current distance traveled
since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles
or kilometers. Both odometers can be used at the
same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing select while the desired trip odometer is
displayed. You can also reset the trip odometers with the
reset stem on the cluster. If you press and hold the reset
stem for four seconds, the display will show the distance
traveled since the last ignition cycle.
2-90
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Fuel Information Button
Use the fuel information button to scroll through the
range, average fuel economy, instant fuel economy and
the GM Oil Life System .
t
Fuel Range
Instant Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears
to display the remaining distance you can drive without
refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the fuel
remaining in the tank. The display will show LOW if
the fuel level is low.
Press the fuel information button until INST appears
in the display. Instant fuel economy is how many miles
per gallon your vehicle is at the particular moment in
time. The instant fuel economy cannot be reset.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Fuel
range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until AVG appears in
the display. Average fuel economy is how many miles
per gallon your vehicle is getting based on current and
past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button while AVG. ECON is
displayed to reset the average fuel economy. Average
fuel economy will then be calculated starting from that
point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it will be
continually updated each time you drive.
t
GM Oil Life System
Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL
LIFE appears in the display. The GM Oil Life System
shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It
will show 100% when the system is reset after an oil
change. It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
t
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change.
To reset the Oil Life System press and hold the select
button while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. Be
careful not to reset the engine oil life accidentally at
any time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It can’t be reset accurately until the next oil change.
2-91
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule
in this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil. If you drive in dusty areas, change your
oil after every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever occurs first, unless the DIC instructs you to
do so sooner. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much oil you have in your engine. So, be
sure to check your oil level often. See “Engine Oil” in
the Index.
Personalization Button
You can program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. Press the personalization button to
scroll through the following personalization features. All
of the personalization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
D ALARM WARNING TYPE
D AUTOMATIC LOCKING
D AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING
2-92
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
SEAT POSITION RECALL (If Equipped)
PERIMETER LIGHTING
REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
TILT MIRROR IN REVERSE (If Equipped)
EASY EXIT SEAT (If Equipped)
DISPLAY UNITS (E/M)
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
The driver’s preferences are recalled by pressing the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
or by pressing the appropriate memory button 1 or 2
located on the driver’s door.
Alarm Warning Type
Press the personalization button until ALARM
WARNING TYPE appears in the display. To select your
personalization for alarm warning type, press the select
button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll
through the following choices:
D ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default)
D ALARM WARNING: OFF
D ALARM WARNING: HORN
D ALARM WARNING: LAMPS
If you choose BOTH, the headlamps will flash and the
horn will chirp when the alarm is active.
If you choose OFF, there will be no alarm warning
on activation.
If you choose HORN, the horn will chirp when the
alarm is active.
If you choose LAMPS, the headlamps will flash when
the alarm is active.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on alarm warning type see “Content
Theft-Deterrent” in the Index.
Automatic Locking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for automatic locking, press the select
button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
D LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default)
D LOCK DOORS MANUALLY
D LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED
If you choose for the doors to lock out of park, the doors
will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
If you choose for the doors to lock manually, the doors
will not be locked automatically.
If you choose for the doors to lock with speed,
the doors will lock when the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see “Programmable
Automatic Door Locks” in the Index.
2-93
Automatic Unlocking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
UNLOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for automatic unlocking, press the select
button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll
through the following choices:
D
D
D
D
UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default)
UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT
UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY
UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK
If you choose for all the doors to unlock in park,
all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted
into PARK (P).
If you choose for all the doors to unlock at key out,
all of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out
of the ignition.
If you choose for the doors to unlock manually, the
doors will not be unlocked automatically.
If you choose for the driver’s door to unlock in park, the
driver’s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is
shifted into PARK (P).
2-94
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see “Programmable
Automatic Door Locks” in the Index.
Seat Position Recall (If Equipped)
Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION
RECALL appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position recall, press the select
button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll
through the following choices:
D SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF (default)
D SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN
D SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE
If you choose seat recall off, the memory seat position
you saved will not be recalled.
If you choose seat recall at key in, the memory seat
position you saved will be recalled when you put the key
in the ignition.
If you choose seat recall on remote, the memory seat
position you saved will be recalled when you unlock the
vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position recall see “Memory Seat
and Mirrors” in the Index.
Perimeter Lighting
Press the personalization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for perimeter lighting, press the select
button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
D PERIMETER LIGHTING ON (default)
D PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF
If you choose for perimeter lighting to be on, the
headlamps and back-up lamps will come on for
40 seconds, if it is dark enough outside, when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
Remote Lock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
D
D
D
D
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default)
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS
If you choose both, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the lock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp
the second time you press the lock button.
If you choose off, there will be no feedback when
locking the vehicle.
If you choose horn, the horn will chirp the second time
you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
2-95
If you choose lamps, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the lock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
If you choose lamps, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature.
If you choose both, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp
the second time you press the unlock button.
Remote Unlock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select
your personalization for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
D
D
D
D
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default)
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN
2-96
If you choose off, there will be no feedback when
unlocking the vehicle.
If you choose horn, the horn will chirp the second time
you press the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamps on at Exit
Tilt Mirror in Reverse (If Equipped)
Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS
ON AT EXIT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the personalization button until TILT MIRROR IN
REVERSE appears in the display. To select your
personalization for tilt mirror in reverse, press the select
button while TILT MIRROR IN REVERSE is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll
through the following choices:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 60 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 120 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 180 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY OFF
D
D
D
D
TILT MIRROR: OFF (default)
TILT MIRROR: PASSENGER
TILT MIRROR: DRIVER
TILT MIRROR: BOTH
If you choose off, neither outside mirror will be tilted
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
If you choose passenger, the passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off the
vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn off
as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
If you choose driver, the driver’s outside mirror
will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the seven options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature.
If you choose both, the driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
2-97
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse see “Curb View
Assist Mirror” in the Index.
Easy Exit Seat (If Equipped)
Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT
SEAT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position exit, press the select
button while SEAT POSITION EXIT is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
D SEAT POSITION EXIT OFF (default)
D SEAT POSITION EXIT ON
If you choose for the easy exit seat feature to be on, the
driver’s seat will move all of the way rearward when the
vehicle is turned off. If you choose for this feature to be
off, no seat exit recall will occur.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit see “Memory Seat and
Mirrors” in the Index.
2-98
Display Units (ENG/MET)
Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric, press
the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll
through the following choices:
D UNITS: ENGLISH
D UNITS: METRIC KM/L
D UNITS: METRIC L/100KM
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon.
If you choose metric KM/L, all information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance in
kilometers and fuel economy in KM/L.
If you choose metric L/100KM, all information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance in
kilometers and fuel economy in L/100KM.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and end out of the personalization options.
Display Language
To select your personalization for display language,
press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following languages:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
English
French
Spanish
If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t
want or understand, press and hold the personalization
button and the trip information button and the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the
languages in their particular language. English will be in
English, French will be in French and so on. When you
see the language that you would like, release both
buttons. The DIC will then display the information in
the language you chose.
Arabic
Choose one of the eight options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
Portuguese
Select Button
Japanese
The select button is used to reset certain functions and
turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display.
The select button also toggles through the options
available in each personalization menu. For example,
this button will reset the trip odometers, turn off the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and toggle through
the languages you can select the DIC to display
information in.
German
Italian
Arabic, Portuguese, Japanese and Italian will only be
available as choices if they are enabled in the vehicle.
Choosing any of the above languages will display all of
the information on the DIC in the desired language.
2-99
DIC Warnings and Messages
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. More than one message may appear at
one time, they will appear one behind the other. Some
messages may not require immediate action but you
should press the select button to acknowledge that you
received the message and clear it from the display. Some
messages cannot be cleared from the display because
they are more urgent. These message required action
before they can be removed from the DIC display. The
following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/IDLE ENGINE
If the cooling system temperature gets hot this message
will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop
the vehicle and let the engine idle in PARK (P) to allow
the coolant to reach a safe temperature. This message
will clear when the coolant temperature drops to a safe
operating temperature.
2-100
ENGINE OVERHEATED/STOP ENGINE
(If Equipped)
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine has
cooled to a safe operating temperature.
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
If low oil pressure levels occur this message will be
displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low
oil pressure has been corrected. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the battery is not charging during operation this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If there is a problem with the air bag system this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have a qualified
technician inspect the system for problems. Pressing the
select button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you
will hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the
liftgate and liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km) this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Pressing the select button will acknowledge
this message and clear it from the DIC display.
CHANGE TRANS FLUID
If this message appears on the DIC it is time to change
the transmission fluid. Take you vehicle in for service
as soon as possible. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
2-101
CHECK OIL LEVEL
ICE POSSIBLE
If the oil level in the vehicle is low this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to need to let the vehicle cool
or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this
message will clear. Once the problem is corrected,
pressing the select button will clear this message from
the DIC display.
If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice
could form on the roadway, this message may appear
on the DIC. If the temperature rises to a safe level the
message will clear. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the driver’s door is not fully closed this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop
and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles,
and close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
If the washer fluid level is low this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
Pressing the select button will acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE
If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to
the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the
transmission to cool. This message will clear when the
fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
2-102
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
RFA # BATTERY LOW
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs to
be replaced in the transmitter. Pressing the select button
will acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
2-103
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-11
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-24
3-32
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic
Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control
(If Equipped)
3-44
3-55
3-56
3-56
3-57
3-57
3-58
3-60
3-60
3-60
3-60
AM-FM Stereo with 6-Disc Compact Disc
Player with Programmable Equalization and
Radio Data System (RDS) (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
3-
3-1
Comfort Controls
Manual Dual Zone Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to use the comfort controls.
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
Comfort Controls Personalization
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the automatic comfort
control system and memory seats and mirrors, you
can store and recall the climate control settings for
temperature, air delivery mode and fan speed for
two different drivers. The personal choice settings
recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter
the vehicle. After the button with the unlock symbol on
a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the climate
control will adjust to the last settings of the identified
driver. The settings can also be changed by pressing one
of the memory buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s
door. When adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for that driver.
3-2
With this system, you can select different comfort
control settings for the driver and passengers.
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the climate control panel
regulates the fan speed. You can choose from five
different fan speeds or turn the fan off.
Driver’s Side Temperature Lever
Mode Knob
The lever on the left side of the climate control panel is
used to adjust the air temperature on the driver’s side,
independent of the temperature set by the passenger.
Slide the lever upward to raise the temperature. Slide the
lever downward to lower the temperature.
The knob on the right side of the control panel has
several settings to control the direction of airflow:
Passenger’s Side Temperature Lever
The lever on the right side of the climate control panel
is used to adjust the air temperature on the passenger’s
side, independent of the temperature set by the driver.
Slide the lever upward to raise the temperature. Slide the
lever downward to lower the temperature.
This lever also adjusts the temperature to the rear
seat outlets.
(Panel): Selecting panel mode will deliver air to
the instrument panel outlets.
(Bi-Level): Selecting bi-level mode will deliver
warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets.
(Floor): Selecting floor mode will deliver air to
the floor outlets and some air to the defroster and side
window vents.
(Defog): Selecting defog will deliver air to the
floor, windshield outlets and side window vents.
(Defrost): Selecting this setting directs most of
the air through the defroster and side window vents.
Some of the air also goes to the floor ducts.
3-3
Mode Buttons
(Recirculation): Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This is
helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your
vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance
in hot weather. Recirculation cannot be used in floor,
blend or defrost modes. An indicator on the button will
light up, flash three times and turn off when
recirculation is selected in these modes.
Automatic Dual Zone Comfort Control
System (Option)
While in the recirculation mode the windows may fog
when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
select either the blend or defrost mode and increase the
fan speed.
(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning compressor on and off. The system will
cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle when the
air conditioning compressor is engaged
3-4
With this system, you can select different comfort
control settings for the driver and passengers.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. Turn the knob counterclockwise to lower the cabin
temperature. The display will show the temperature
decreasing as you turn the knob counterclockwise. Turn
the knob clockwise to increase the cabin temperature.
The display will show the temperature increasing as you
turn the knob clockwise. When this knob is adjusted, the
word DRIVER will be displayed under the temperature
setting. If the passenger’s set temperature has not been
adjusted, this knob controls both the driver’s and
passenger’s air temperature.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the
temperature of the air coming through the system on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to lower the cabin temperature. The
display will show the temperature decreasing as you turn
the knob counterclockwise. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature increasing as you turn the knob
clockwise. When this knob is adjusted, only the word
PASS will be displayed under the temperature setting.
The temperature to the rear seat area is controlled by
using this knob.
Once this knob is used, the passenger’s set temperature
will remain independent of the driver’s until the ignition
has been turned off.
Fan Switch
The switch with the fan symbol allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed.
MODE Button
Press this button to manually select the air delivery
mode to the floor, panel or windshield outlets. The
system will stay in the selected mode until the MODE
button is pressed again or the AUTO button is pressed.
Display
In full AUTO mode, the automatic climate control
system display will show the outside temperature,
labeled EXT for external temperature, and AUTO.
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to also show you the
current system mode. If you press the up or down
arrows on the fan switch, the display will change to
show the selected fan speed. After five seconds, the
display will change to show the EXT temperature and
the selected manual setting.
3-5
Automatic Operation
Press the AUTO button to set the system to
automatically control the air delivery mode, fan speed,
air temperature and recirculation operations. Whenever
you press AUTO, the display will change to show the
current driver’s set temperature, automatic air delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds and the display will show the
passenger’s set temperature. After five seconds the
display will change to the EXT (external) temperature
outside the vehicle.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The air
conditioning compressor will run when outside
temperature is over approximately 40_F (4_C).
The air inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s
hot outside, the air inlet will automatically switch
to recirculated inside air to help quickly cool down
your vehicle.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74_ F (23_C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the
system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or passenger’s side
temperature knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If you
choose the temperature setting of 60_F (15_C), the
3-6
system will remain at the maximum cooling setting and
fan speed. If you choose the temperature setting of 90_F
(32_C), the system will remain at the maximum heat
setting and fan speed. Choosing either maximum setting
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load, and also
turns on your headlamps.
The EXT (exterior) temperature sensor is located in the
front of the vehicle behind the grille. The displayed
temperature is most accurate after the vehicle has been
moving for a few minutes. If the vehicle is stopped and
then restarted within 2 1/2 hours, the sensor will be hot
from the engine heat. In this case, the temperature first
displayed will continue to be the temperature that was
displayed before the vehicle was turned off. The display
will update after the vehicle has been moving for a few
minutes and the sensor has a chance to cool down to the
actual temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed. Use the mode button to cycle through the
following four air delivery modes:
(Panel): This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
(Bi-Level): This setting will deliver warmer air to
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
(Floor): This setting will deliver air to the
floor outlets.
(Defog): This setting will deliver air to the floor
and windshield outlets.
OFF: Press this button to turn the system off. Some
fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle from
the floor outlets. The system will try to maintain the
previously chosen temperature setting.
(Recirculation): Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This is
helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your
vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance
in hot weather. Press this button again to allow outside
air to enter the vehicle
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or
floor, the light on the button will flash and go out to let
you know this is not allowed. This is to prevent fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog,
select either defog or FRONT defrost. Be sure A/C OFF
is not selected to allow the air conditioning compressor
to run automatically and help dehumidify the air.
(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air conditioning compressor on and off. When air
conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, the system
will run the air conditioning automatically to cool and
dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you select
A/C OFF while in FRONT defrost, the A/C OFF text
will flash to let you know this is not allowed. This is to
prevent fogging.
FRONT (Defrost): Press this button to defrost
the windshield. The system will automatically control
the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO. If the
outside temperature is 40_F (4_C) or warmer, your air
conditioning compressor will automatically run to help
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
3-7
Air Conditioning
Heating
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
If you have the manual system, on cold days use floor
with the temperature lever in the red area. If you have
the automatic system, press AUTO and adjust the
temperature by turning the temperature knob clockwise
or counterclockwise. You may also adjust the automatic
system manually by pressing the MODE button and
selecting floor. Again, adjust the temperature by turning
the temperature knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
If your vehicle has the manual system, for quick
cool-down on very hot days, use the airflow from the
panel outlets, press recirculation and air conditioning
with the temperature control in the blue area. If this max
air conditioning setting is used for long periods of time,
the air in your vehicle may become too cold and dry.
For normal cooling on hot days, use air conditioning
without recirculation with the temperature control in the
blue area.
If your vehicle has the automatic system, press the
AUTO button and the system will cool and dehumidify
the air inside the vehicle. Also while in this mode, the
system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
On cool, but sunny days, with the manual system or
through manual operation of the automatic system,
use bi-level to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler
air to the instrument panel outlets. To warm or cool
the air delivered, turn the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3-8
With either system, outside air will be heated and sent
through the floor outlets. The heater works best if you
keep the windows closed while using it.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use defog to keep the windshield
and side windows clear. Use the FRONT defrost button
to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in
extremely humid or cold conditions.
If your vehicle has the manual system, select defog and
adjust the fan speed to your comfort level. Turn the air
conditioning on to help dehumidify the air. Use front
defrost with the temperature toward the red area and the
fan control toward high.
If your vehicle has the automatic system and you select
FRONT defrost or defog from AUTO, the system will
control the fan speed. Adjust the temperature and fan
speed to your comfort level. After the windshield is
clear, adjust the temperature to your normal setting and
select the AUTO button and return to AUTO mode and
fan control.
For maximum front defrost performance under extreme
icing or frosting conditions, increase the temperature
setting to 90_F (32_C) and increase the fan speed
to high.
Rear Window Defogger
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this
button will activate them.
After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself, or press the
button during the heating cycle to turn it off. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that is sharp. This may damage
the defogger grid. The repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
Press the button to start warming your window. A light
will glow in the button while the defogger is working.
3-9
Rear Comfort Controls
Your vehicle has one of the following rear comfort
control systems. With either system, the rear comfort
controls will be disabled when the front comfort control
system is in defrost. This occurs to provide maximum
airflow to clear the windshield.
The temperature of the air coming through the rear
outlets is determined by the front passenger’s
temperature setting. Press the PWR button to turn the
rear comfort controls on and off. Use the mode knob to
change the direction of airflow (upper, bi-level or floor)
to the rear seat area.
3-10
If your vehicle has the rear seat audio system the lower
buttons are used to adjust the rear seat comfort controls.
The temperature of the air coming through the rear
outlets is determined by the front passenger’s
temperature setting. The button with the up and down
arrows on it regulates the fan speed. The mode button
can be used to change the direction of airflow (upper,
bi-level or floor) to the rear seat area. To turn the rear
comfort controls off, press the lower PWR button.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating
or cooling is needed, use the panel outlet setting
(on the manual system) to direct outside air through
your vehicle. Air will flow through the instrument
panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it’s moving. When the
vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow
through by selecting any air delivery mode and any
fan speed.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust
the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down and move the control
in the center of each outlet side-to-side to direct the
air from the outlet. Use the thumbwheel next to or
underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For the most
efficient airflow and temperature control, keep the outlet
in the fully opened position.
The rear seat outlets can be used to adjust the airflow
toward either seating area, the floor or upward. Move
the control in the center of each outlet in any direction
to direct airflow.
3-11
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will work better, reducing the chance of
fogging your windows.
D In cool damp weather, minimize your use of
recirculation to reduce the chance of fogging
your windows.
Comfort Control Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, you can control
certain comfort control
functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
D When you enter a vehicle with the manual system in
cold weather, select floor mode to supply air through
the floor outlets. Then turn the fan on high for a few
moments before driving away. This will blow moist
air from the intake outlets toward the floor, not the
windshield. It reduces the chance of fogging your
windows. If you have the automatic system, the
AUTO setting will do this for you. Manual operation
of the automatic system in the floor mode will also
supply air through the floor outlets.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
3-12
(Fan): Press the up arrow to increase the fan speed
and the down arrow to decrease the fan speed.
(Temperature): Press the up arrow to increase the
temperature of the air flowing through the system and
the down arrow to decrease the temperature of the air
flowing through the system.
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock
Press and hold the HR or MN buttons, located below the
tune knob, for two seconds. Then press and hold HR
until the correct hour appears. AM or PM will appear on
the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears. The clock may be set with the ignition on or
off. The clock symbol will appear on the display in
time-set mode.
To set the clock to the time of an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
HR and MN at the same time for two seconds until
UPDATED and the clock symbol appear on the display.
If the time is not available from the station, NO UPDAT
will appear on the display instead.
RDS clock time is broadcast once a minute. Once you
have tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes before pressing and holding the HR MN
buttons will result in an update to the clock time.
Playing the Radio
VOL PWR: Press this control to turn the system on and
off. Turn this control clockwise to increase volume.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
3-13
AUTO VOL: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press AUTO VOL
to adjust the SCV. AVOL will appear on the display.
Each time you press AUTO VOL, another volume
setting (LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH or OFF) will appear
on the display. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive. Each volume setting
allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want
to use SCV, select OFF.
3-14
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE DISP: Turn this control to choose radio stations.
Pressing this control will also display an RDS station
frequency or program type when the radio is on.
Pressing this control when the ignition is off will display
the clock.
A
"
SEEK PSCAN : To seek, press the right arrow to
tune to the next station and the left arrow to tune to the
previous station and stay there.
To scan your preset stations, press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep. Use preset scan to listen to each of
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for
a few seconds. The radio will scan through each of
the stations stored on your pushbuttons, except those
stations with weak reception. Press one of the arrows or
one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. SCAN
will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset
scan mode. The channel number (P1 through P6) will
appear with the frequency. In FM mode, this function
will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO: To adjust the bass, press and
release the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control until BASS
appears on the display. Then turn the control clockwise
to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.
The display will show the bass level.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you
are listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons.
The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the bass and treble equalization that
you selected will also be automatically selected for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To set the bass to the middle position, press and hold the
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
To adjust the treble, press and release the P-TYPE
LIST AUDIO control until TREB appears on the
display. Turn the control clockwise to increase treble
and counterclockwise to decrease treble. The display
will show the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
3-15
To set treble to the middle position, press and hold the
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
When you use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE
setting will return to manual.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for rock,
news, pop, jazz, classical and country stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this
feature will change to one of the preset equalization
settings previously listed.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, press
and release the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. See
“Setting Preset Stations” listed previously to program
the auto tone feature.
3-16
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance, press and release the P-TYPE
LIST AUDIO control until BAL appears on the display.
Turn the control clockwise to move the sound to the
right speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound
to the left speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between the
speakers. To set the balance to the middle position, press
the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control briefly, then press it
again and hold it until the radio emits one beep. The
balance will be set to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
To adjust the fade, press and release the P-TYPE LIST
AUDIO control until FADE appears on the display. Turn
the control clockwise to move the sound to the front
speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the
rear speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between the
speakers. To set the fade to the middle position, press
the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control briefly, then press
it again and hold it until the radio emits one beep. The
fade will be set to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS is a system that sends data along
with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned
to. RDS displays program information and can control
your radio. With RDS, the radio can do the following:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
RDS features are only available on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information. The RDS features on your
radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from
these stations. These features will only work when the
RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
will appear on the display, instead of the frequency.
Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time
of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current
programming. Some stations also provide the name of
the current program.
TUNE DISP: Press this control to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. Pressing this control
will also display an RDS station frequency or program
type when the radio is on. The display options are
station name, station frequency, PTY and the name of
the program (if available). Pressing and holding this
control will activate the RDS default display.
national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
3-17
Accessing RDS Stations
To access RDS stations perform the following steps:
1. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE
LIST AUDIO control to display the program
type list.
2. Turn the control either clockwise or
counterclockwise to select a program type. The list
is alphabetical. If you select ANY TYPE your radio
will seek to the first PTY available.
3. Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search.
VOL PWR: Turn this control clockwise to increase
volume when RDS interrupts regular play. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO: Turn this control clockwise
or counterclockwise to select the Program Type (PTY)
you want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and the radio
will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the selected
program type. If the radio cannot find the desired
program type, NONE will appear on the display and the
radio will return to the last station you were listening to.
3-18
AM FM: The AM FM button operates the alternate
frequency feature. This feature allows the radio to
switch automatically to a stronger station with the same
programming. Alternate frequency is off by default from
the factory. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to
turn alternate frequency on or off. AF ON or AF OFF
will appear on the display and the radio will beep once.
The radio will not switch automatically to other stations
when alternate frequency is off.
SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with
the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display, if it is not already showing.
Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. If a station
with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return
to the original station and display NONE.
RDS Radio Announcements
(Alert): Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! appears on the display when an alert
announcement plays. When an alert announcement
comes on the tuned radio station, you will hear it, even
if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc
is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is
playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
This function will only work during actual emergency
broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
INFO: If the current station has a message, the INFO
icon will appear on the display. These text messages are
from the RDS broadcaster to the listening public and
may be general information such as artist and song title,
call in phone numbers, etc. Press this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every
three seconds until the message is completed.
To scroll through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button again for less than one second. A new
group of words will appear on the display. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the INFO icon
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station that does. The TRAF icon will flash on the
display. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAF will appear on the display.
Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback
of a cassette tape, CD or FM radio by enabling the
traffic interrupt feature. Press the TRAF button once to
seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt
feature if the current tuned station does not. The TRAF
icon will flash on the display when seeking for a station
that supports traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt
feature is on, TRAF will appear on the display.
3-19
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The TRAF icon
and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the
traffic announcement plays. If the cassette tape or
compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact
disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point
where it stopped.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this
player. The longer side with the tape visible should face
to the right. If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the
tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A tape
symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the
tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove the
tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL PWR, the TUNE
DISP control, and the SEEK PSCAN control just as you
do for the radio. The display will show TAPE and an
arrow showing which side of the tape is playing.
3-20
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off, first
press EJT or TUNE DISP.
If an error appears on the display, see “Radio/Cassette
Tape Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV: Press this button or the left SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the previous selection on the tape if the
selection has been playing for less than three seconds.
If the 1 PREV button or the left SEEK PSCAN arrow is
pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the
current selection. If the 1 PREV button or the left SEEK
PSCAN arrow is pressed and the current selection has
been playing from 3 to 13 seconds, it will go to the
beginning of the previous selection or the beginning of
the current selection, depending upon the position on the
tape. SEEK and a -1 will appear on the display while the
cassette player is in the 1 PREV mode. If 1 PREV or the
left SEEK PSCAN arrow is pressed additional times or
held, the radio will go to the displayed number of
previous selections up to 9. SEEK and a negative
number will appear on the display. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for 1 PREV to work. The sound will mute
while seeking.
2 NEXT: Press this button to go to the next selection on
the tape. If you press the button more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the tape.
SEEK and a positive number will appear on the display.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for 2 NEXT to work. To forward
through each selection press the right SEEK PSCAN
arrow. The sound will mute while seeking.
3 REV: Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last selected station while the tape reverses. The
station frequency and 3 REV will appear on the display.
You may select stations during reverse operation by
using TUNE DISP and the SEEK PSCAN arrows.
4 FWD: Press this button to advance quickly to another
part of the tape. Press the button again to return to
playing speed. The radio will play the last selected
station while the tape advances. The station frequency
and 4 FWD will appear on the display. You may select
stations during forward operation by using TUNE DISP
and the SEEK PSCAN arrows.
5 SIDE: Press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
D
6
RDM: Press this button to reduce background
noise. NR ON will appear on the display. Press it again
to turn Dolby off. NR OFF will appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
A SEEK PSCAN ": SEEK PSCAN and a right
pointing arrow is the same as 2 NEXT, and a left
pointing arrow and SEEK PSCAN is the same as
1 PREV. If the button is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward or backward
through the tape. SEEK and a positive or negative
number will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
3-21
TAPE AUX: With a cassette tape in the player and the
radio playing, press this button to play a cassette tape.
Press AM FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape
is playing. The inactive tape will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
EJT: Press this button to remove a tape. The radio
will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off if this
button is pressed first.
Tight/Loose Tape Sensor Defeat
With the radio off and the ignition on, press and hold the
TAPE AUX button to disable the tight/loose tape
sensing feature to enable play of some tape head
cleaners and portable CD adapters. The radio will
display READY and flash the cassette icon. The
tight/loose tape sensing feature will then be disabled
until the next time a cassette is ejected.
3-22
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the radio off.
2. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display
for five seconds, indicating the feature is active.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power
up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJT
is pressed.
Radio/Cassette Tape Messages
(CAL ERR): This message is displayed when the radio
has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle. You
must return to the dealership for service.
(LOCKED): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
(CHK TAPE): If CHK TAPE appears on the radio
display, the tape won’t play because of one of the
following errors.
(CLEAN): If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold the EJT button for five
seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator. The radio will
display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
D The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open
end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
D The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
D The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
3-23
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AUTO VOL: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press AUTO VOL to
adjust the SCV. AVOL will appear on the display. Each
time you press AUTO VOL, another volume setting
(LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH or OFF) will appear on the
display. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. Each volume setting allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to use
SCV, select OFF.
Finding a Station
Playing the Radio
VOL PWR: Press this control to turn the system on and
off. Turn this control clockwise to increase volume.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE DISP: Turn this control to choose radio stations.
Pressing this control will also display an RDS station
frequency or program type when the radio is on.
Pressing this control when the ignition is off will display
the clock.
3-24
A
"
SEEK PSCAN : To seek, press the right arrow to
tune to the next station and the left arrow to tune to the
previous station and stay there.
To scan your preset stations, press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep. Use preset scan to listen to each of
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for
a few seconds. The radio will scan through each of the
stations stored on your pushbuttons, except those
stations with weak reception. Press one of the arrows or
one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. SCAN
will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset
scan mode. The channel number (P1 through P6) will
appear with the frequency. In FM mode, this function
will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you are
listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons.
The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the bass and treble equalization that
you selected will also be automatically selected for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-25
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO: To adjust the bass, press and
release the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control until BASS
appears on the display. Then turn the control clockwise
to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.
The display will show the bass level.
To set the bass to the middle position, press and hold the
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
To adjust the treble, press and release the P-TYPE LIST
AUDIO control until TREB appears on the display.
Turn the control clockwise to increase treble and
counterclockwise to decrease treble. The display will
show the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
3-26
To set treble to the middle position, press and hold
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
When you use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE
setting will return to manual.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for rock,
news, pop, jazz, classical and country stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this
feature will change to one of the preset equalization
settings previously listed.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, press
and release the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. See
“Setting Preset Stations” listed previously to program
the auto tone feature.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance, press and release the P-TYPE
LIST AUDIO control until BAL appears on the display.
Turn the control clockwise to move the sound to the
right speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound
to the left speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between the
speakers. To set the fade to the middle position, press
the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control briefly, then press
it again and hold it until the radio emits one beep. The
fade will be set to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
The middle position balances the sound between the
speakers. To set the balance to the middle position, press
the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control briefly, then press it
again and hold it until the radio emits one beep. The
balance will be set to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS is a system that sends data along
with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned
to. You can use RDS to display program information
and to control your radio. With RDS your radio can do
the following:
To adjust the fade, press and release the P-TYPE LIST
AUDIO control until FADE appears on the display. Turn
the control clockwise to move the sound to the front
speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the
rear speakers.
Using RDS
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
3-27
RDS features are only available on FM stations which
broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your
radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from
these stations. These features will only work when the
RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
will appear on the display, instead of the frequency.
Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time
of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current
programming. Some stations also provide the name of
the current program.
TUNE DISP: Press this control to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. Pressing this control
will also display an RDS station frequency or program
type when the radio is on. The display options are
station name, station frequency, PTY and the name of
the program (if available). Pressing and holding this
control will activate the RDS default display.
3-28
Accessing RDS
To access RDS stations perform the following steps:
1. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE
LIST AUDIO control to display the program
type list.
2. Turn the control either clockwise or
counterclockwise to select a program type. The list
is alphabetical. If you select ANY TYPE your radio
will seek to the first PTY available.
3. Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search.
VOL PWR: Turn this control clockwise to increase
volume when RDS interrupts regular play. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO: Turn this control clockwise
or counterclockwise to select the Program Type (PTY)
you want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and the radio
will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the selected
program type. If the radio cannot find the desired
program type, NONE will appear on the display and the
radio will return to the last station you were listening to.
AM FM: The AM FM button operates the alternate
frequency feature. This feature allows the radio to
switch automatically to a stronger station with the same
programming. Alternate frequency is off by default from
the factory. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to
turn alternate frequency on or off. AF ON or AF OFF
will appear on the display and the radio will beep once.
The radio will not switch automatically to other stations
when alternate frequency is off.
SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with
the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display, if it is not already showing.
Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. If a station
with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return
to the original station and display NONE.
RDS Radio Announcements
(Alert): Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! appears on the display when an alert
announcement plays. When an alert announcement
comes on the tuned radio station, you will hear it, even
if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc
is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is
playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
This function will only work during actual emergency
broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
INFO: If the current station has a message, the INFO
icon will appear on the display. These text messages are
from the RDS broadcaster to the listening public and
may be general information such as artist and song title,
call in phone numbers, etc. Press this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press the INFO
button again for less than one second. A new group of
words will appear on the display. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the INFO icon will
disappear from the display until another new message is
received. The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to
a station that does. The TRAF icon will flash on the
display. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAF will appear on the display.
3-29
Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback
of a cassette tape, CD or FM radio by enabling the
traffic interrupt feature. Press the TRAF button once to
seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt
feature if the current tuned station does not. The TRAF
icon will flash on the display when seeking for a station
that supports traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt
feature is on, TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The TRAF icon
and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the
traffic announcement plays. If the cassette tape or
compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact
disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point
where it stopped.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want to
insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
TUNE DISP or EJT.
If an error appears on the display, see “Radio/Compact
Disc Messages” later in this section.
3-30
1 PREV: Press this button or the left SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection
has been playing for less than eight seconds. If the
1 PREV button or the left SEEK PSCAN arrow is
pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If you hold the 1 PREV button
or left SEEK PSCAN arrow or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving back through the disc.
The sound will mute while seeking.
2 NEXT: Press this button or the right SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the next track. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If you hold the
2 NEXT button or the right SEEK PSCAN arrow
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3 REV: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
within a track. Press and hold this button for less than
two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to
reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it
to play the passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
4 FWD: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Press and hold this button for less than
two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to
advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it
to play the passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
TUNE DISP: Press this control to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
control until you see the display you want, then hold
the control for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep.
6 RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM ON will appear on
the display. RDM T and the track number will appear on
the display when each track starts to play. Press 6 RDM
again to turn off random play. RDM OFF will appear on
the display.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a disc is in the player. The disc will stop but remain in
the player.
A
"
SEEK PSCAN : Press the left SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the start of the current or previous track.
Press the right SEEK PSCAN arrow to go to the start of
the next track. If either of the SEEK PSCAN arrows is
held or pressed more then once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
CD AUX: With a CD in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a CD. Press AM FM
to return to the radio when a CD is playing. The inactive
CD will remain safely inside the radio for
future listening.
EJT: Press this button to remove the disc. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio
and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
3-31
Radio/Compact Disc Messages
(CAL ERR): This message is displayed when the radio
has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle. You
must return to the dealership for service.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control
(If Equipped)
(LOCKED): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
(Err): If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s
very hot, the disc may not play and Err (error) may
appear on the display. When the road becomes
smooth or the temperature returns to normal, the disc
should play. If the disc comes out, it could be one of
the following:
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
3-32
Standard Radio--BoseR not shown
Playing the Radio
VOL PWR: Press this control to turn the system on and
off. Turn this control clockwise to increase volume.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
AUTO VOL: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press AUTO VOL
to adjust the SCV. AVOL will appear on the display.
Each time you press AUTO VOL, another volume
setting (LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH or OFF) will appear on
the display. The volume level should always sound the
same to you as you drive. Each volume setting allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to use
SCV, select OFF.
If your vehicle has the Bose radio, your audio system
monitors the noise inside your vehicle. Then, automatic
volume automatically adjusts the volume of your radio
so that it always sounds the same to you. To use
automatic volume, press the AUTO VOL button until
AVOL ON appears on the display. To turn the automatic
volume off, press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE DISP: Turn this control to choose radio stations.
Pressing this control will also display an RDS station
frequency or program type when the radio is on.
Pressing this control when the ignition is off will display
the clock.
A
"
SEEK PSCAN : To seek, press the right arrow to
tune to the next station and the left arrow to tune to the
previous station and stay there.
To scan your preset stations, press and hold one of the
arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep. Use preset scan to listen to each of
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a
few seconds. The radio will scan through each of the
stations stored on your pushbuttons, except those
stations with weak reception. Press one of the arrows or
one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. SCAN
will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset
scan mode. The channel number (P1 through P6) will
appear with the frequency. In FM mode, this function
will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2.
3-33
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO: To adjust the bass, press and
release the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control until BASS
appears on the display. Then turn the control clockwise
to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.
The display will show the bass level.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you
are listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons.
The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the bass and treble equalization that
you selected will also be automatically selected for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To set the bass to the middle position, press and hold the
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
To adjust the treble, press and release the P-TYPE LIST
AUDIO control until TREB appears on the display.
Turn the control clockwise to increase treble and
counterclockwise to decrease treble. The display will
show the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
To set treble to the middle position, press and hold
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to the middle position.
3-34
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
When you use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE
setting will return to manual.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for rock,
news, pop, jazz, classical and country stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this
feature will change to one of the preset equalization
settings previously listed.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, press
and release the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control. See
“Setting Preset Stations” listed previously to program
the auto tone feature.
If your vehicle has the Bose radio, your audio system
allows you to choose from four different equalization
settings: talk, driver, normal and spatial. These settings
can be used while listening to the radio, the cassette tape
or CD player.
Press the AUTO TONE button to scroll through your
choices. Select TALK when listening to non-musical
material such as news, talk shows, sports broadcasts and
books on tape. This setting makes spoken words sound
very clear. Select DRIVER to give the driver the best
possible sound qualities. Select NORMAL to enhance
the stereo effect. Select SPATIAL to make the listening
space seem larger. When NORMAL is displayed, the
system will provide the best overall Bose performance.
The radio saves separate AUTO TONE settings for each
preset and source.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance, press and release the P-TYPE
LIST AUDIO control until BAL appears on the display.
Turn the control clockwise to move the sound to the
right speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound
to the left speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between the
speakers. To set the balance to the middle position, press
the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control briefly, then press it
again and hold it until the radio emits one beep. The
balance will be set to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
3-35
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
To adjust the fade, press and release the P-TYPE LIST
AUDIO control until FADE appears on the display.
Turn the control clockwise to move the sound to the
front speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound
to the rear speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between the
speakers. To set the fade to the middle position, press
the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO control briefly, then press
it again and hold it until the radio emits one beep. The
fade will be set to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST AUDIO
control when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.
3-36
Using RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS is a system that sends data along
with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned
to. You can use RDS to display program information
and to control your radio. With RDS, the radio can do
the following:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS features are only available on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your
radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from
these stations. These features will only work when the
RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
will appear on the display, instead of the frequency.
Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time
of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current
programming. Some stations also provide the name of
the current program.
TUNE DISP: Press this control to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. Pressing this control
will also display an RDS station frequency or program
type when the radio is on. The display options are
station name, station frequency, PTY and the name of
the program (if available). Pressing and holding this
control will activate the RDS default display.
Accessing RDS Stations
To access RDS stations perform the following steps:
1. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE
LIST AUDIO control to display the program
type list.
2. Turn the control either clockwise or
counterclockwise to select a program type. The list
is alphabetical. If you select ANY TYPE your radio
will seek to the first PTY available.
3. Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search.
VOL PWR: Turn this control clockwise to increase
volume when RDS interrupts regular play. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
P-TYPE LIST AUDIO: Turn this control clockwise or
counterclockwise to select the Program Type (PTY) you
want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and the radio
will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the selected
program type. If the radio cannot find the desired
program type, NONE will appear on the display and the
radio will return to the last station you were listening to.
AM FM: The AM FM button operates the alternate
frequency feature. This feature allows the radio to
switch automatically to a stronger station with the same
programming. Alternate frequency is off by default from
the factory. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to
turn alternate frequency on or off. AF ON or AF OFF
will appear on the display and the radio will beep once.
The radio will not switch automatically to other stations
when alternate frequency is off.
SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with
the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display, if it is not already showing.
Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. If a station
with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return
to the original station and display NONE.
3-37
RDS Radio Announcements
(Alert): Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! appears on the display when an alert
announcement plays. When an alert announcement
comes on the tuned radio station, you will hear it, even
if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc
is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is
playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
This function will only work during actual emergency
broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
INFO: If the current station has a message, the INFO
icon will appear on the display. These text messages are
from the RDS broadcaster to the listening public and
may be general information such as artist and song title,
call in phone numbers, etc. Press this button to see
the message. If the whole message does not appear
on the display, parts of the message will appear every
three seconds until the message is completed.
3-38
To scroll through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button again for less than one second. A new
group of words will appear on the display. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the INFO icon
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
TRAF:Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station that does. The TRAF icon will flash on the
display. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAF will appear on the display.
Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback
of a cassette tape, CD or FM radio by enabling the
traffic interrupt feature. Press the TRAF button once to
seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt
feature if the current tuned station does not. The TRAF
icon will flash on the display when seeking for a station
that supports traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt
feature is on, TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The TRAF icon
and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the
traffic announcement plays. If the cassette tape or
compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact
disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point
where it stopped.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this
player. The longer side with the tape visible should face
to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the
tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A tape
symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the
tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove the
tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the volume, fade, balance,
treble, bass, and seek controls just as you do for the
radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off, first
press EJT or DISP.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV: Press this button or the left SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the previous selection on the tape if the
selection has been playing for less than three seconds.
If the 1 PREV button or the left SEEK PSCAN arrow is
pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the
current selection. If the 1 PREV button or the left SEEK
PSCAN arrow is pressed and the current selection has
been playing from 3 to 13 seconds, it will go to the
beginning of the previous selection or the beginning of
the current selection, depending upon the position on the
tape. SEEK and a “-1” will appear on the display while
the cassette player is in the previous mode. If 1 PREV or
the left SEEK PSCAN arrow is pressed additional times
or held, the radio will go to the displayed number of
previous selections up to “9”. SEEK and a negative
number will appear on the display. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for previous to work. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-39
2 NEXT: Press this button to go to the next selection
on the tape. If you press the button more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the tape.
SEEK and a positive number will appear on the display.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for next to work. To forward
through each selection press the right SEEK PSCAN
arrow. The sound will mute while seeking.
3 REV: Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last selected station while the tape reverses. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
You may select stations during reverse operation by
using TUNE DISP and the SEEK PSCAN arrows.
4 FWD: Press this button to advance quickly to another
part of the tape. Press the button again to return to
playing speed. The radio will play the last selected
station while the tape advances. The station frequency
and FWD will appear on the display. You may select
stations during forward operation by using TUNE DISP
and the SEEK PSCAN arrows.
5 SIDE: Press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
D
6
RDM: Press this button to reduce background
noise. NR ON will appear on the display. Press it again
to turn Dolby off. NR OFF will appear on the display.
3-40
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
A
"
SEEK PSCAN : SEEK PSCAN (right arrow) is
the same as 2 NEXT, and SEEK PSCAN (left arrow) is
the same as 1 PREV. If the button is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
forward or backward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive or negative number will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
TAPE CD: With a tape in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a tape. Press AM FM
to return to the radio when a tape is playing. Press TAPE
CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both
are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
EJT: Press this button to remove a tape. The radio
will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off if this
button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
(CHK TAPE): If CHK TAPE appears on the radio
display, the tape won’t play because of one of the
following errors.
D The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
D The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
D The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
(CLEAN): If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold the cassette eject button for
five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator. The radio
display will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
Tight/Loose Tape Sensor Defeat
With the radio off and the ignition on, press and hold the
TAPE CD button to disable the tight/loose tape sensing
feature to enable play of some tape head cleaners and
portable CD adapters. The radio will display READY
and flash the cassette icon. The tight/loose tape sensing
feature will then be disabled until the next time a
cassette is ejected.
3-41
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want to
insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
TUNE DISP or EJT.
If an error appears on the display, see “Radio/Compact
Disc Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV: Press this button or the left SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection
has been playing for less than eight seconds. If the
1 PREV button or the left SEEK PSCAN arrow is
pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If you hold the 1 PREV button
or left SEEK PSCAN arrow or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving back through the disc.
The sound will mute while seeking.
2 NEXT: Press this button or the right SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the next track. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If you hold the
2 NEXT button or the right SEEK PSCAN arrow or
press it more than once, the player will continue
moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-42
3 REV: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
within a track. Press and hold this button for less than
two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to
reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it
to play the passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
4 FWD: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Press and hold this button for less than
two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to
advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it
to play the passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
D
6
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON will
appear on the display. RDM T and the track number will
appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press 6 RDM again to turn off random play. RDM OFF
will appear on the display.
A
"
SEEK PSCAN : Press the left SEEK PSCAN
arrow to go to the start of the current or previous track.
Press the right SEEK PSCAN button to go to the start of
the next track. If either of the SEEK PSCAN arrows is
held or pressed more then once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
TUNE DISP: Press this control to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
control until you see the display you want, then hold
the control for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep.
Compact Disc Messages
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a disc is in the player. The disc will stop but remain in
the player.
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
CD AUX: With a CD in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a CD. Press AM FM
to return to the radio when a CD is playing. The inactive
CD will remain safely inside the radio for
future listening.
EJT: Press this button to remove the disc. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio
and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
(Err): If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s
very hot, the disc may not play and Err (error) may
appear on the display. When the road becomes smooth
or the temperature returns to normal, the disc should
play. If the disc comes out, it could be one of
the following:
and try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
(CAL ERR): This message is displayed when the radio
has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle. You
must return to the dealership for service.
(LOCKED): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
3-43
AM-FM Stereo with 6-Disc Compact
Disc Player with Programmable
Equalization and Radio Data
System (RDS) (If Equipped)
Standard radio--BoseR not shown
3-44
Playing the Radio
VOLUME PWR: Press this control to turn the system
on and off. To increase volume, turn the control
clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
AUTO VOL: Your system has a feature called
automatic volume. With this feature, your audio system
adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind
noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level.
Press this button to select MIN, MED, MAX or OFF.
Each choice allows for more volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic
volume automatically increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you
as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic volume,
select OFF.
If your vehicle has the Bose radio, your audio system
monitors the noise inside your vehicle. Then,
automatically adjusts the volume so that it always
sounds the same to you. To use automatic volume, press
the AUTO VOL button until AVOL ON appears on the
display. To turn automatic volume off, press the AUTO
VOL button until AVOL OFF appears on the display.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
TUNE RCL P-TYPE: Turn this control to select
radio stations.
tSEEK SCANu: To seek, press the right or left arrow
1. Turn the radio on.
briefly to go to the next or previous station and stay
there. The sound will mute while seeking.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
To scan, press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and you hear
a beep. Use scan to listen to stations for a few seconds.
The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press either SEEK SCAN
arrow again to stop scanning. If you press SEEK SCAN
for more than four seconds, the radio will change to
preset scan mode. The sound will mute while scanning.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best
suits the type of station selected.
To scan your preset pushbuttons, press and hold either
SEEK SCAN arrow for more than four seconds,
PRESET SCAN will appear on the display. You will hear
a double beep and the P will blink with the preset
number. Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each of your
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press either
SEEK SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return
and the equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that pushbutton.
3-45
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: To set the bass, press the AUDIO control until
BASS appears on the display. Turn the control to
increase or decrease bass. When you use this control, the
radio’s tone setting will switch to custom.
To set the treble, press the AUDIO control until TREB
appears on the display. Turn the control to increase or
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
tone setting will switch to custom. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To set the bass to the middle position, select BASS and
press and hold the AUDIO control. The radio will
produce one beep and set the display level to zero. To
set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position,
press and hold the AUDIO control when no tone or
speaker control is active. The radio will produce one
beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
To set treble to the middle position, select TREB and
press and hold the AUDIO control. The radio will
produce one beep and set the display level to zero.
To set the midrange, press the AUDIO control until MID
appears on the display. Turn the control to increase or
decrease midrange. When you use this control, the
radio’s tone setting will switch to custom.
AUTO EQ: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass, midrange and treble equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical stations.
To set the midrange to the middle position, select MID
and press and hold the AUDIO control. The radio will
produce one beep and set the display level to zero.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the AUDIO control when no
tone or speaker control is active. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-46
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the AUDIO control when no
tone or speaker control is active. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
The setting last chosen will appear on the display when
you first press AUTO EQ. Each time you press this
button, another setting will appear on the display and
AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset settings
previously listed.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the
AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the
display. Then you will be able to manually adjust the
bass, midrange and treble using the AUDIO button. To
find out how to do this, see Setting the Tone following.
If your vehicle has the Bose radio, your audio system
allows you to choose from four different equalization
settings: talk, driver, normal and spatial. These settings
can be used while listening to the radio or the CD player.
Press the AUTO EQ button to scroll through your
choices. Select TALK when listening to non-musical
material such as news, talk shows, sports broadcasts and
books on tape. This settings makes spoken words sound
very clear. Select DRIVER to give the driver the best
possible sound qualities. Select NORMAL to enhance
the stereo effect. Select SPATIAL to make the listening
space seem larger. When AUTO EQ NORMAL is
displayed, the system will provide the best overall Bose
performance. The radio saves separate AUTO EQ
settings for each preset and source.
Adjusting the Speakers
AUDIO (Balance/Fade): The AUDIO control
adjusts balance and fade. To adjust balance, press the
AUDIO control until BAL appears on the display.
Turn the control to adjust the sound to the left or right
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
To adjust fade, press and hold the AUDIO control until
FAD appears on the display. Turn the control to adjust
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
To set the balance and fade to the middle position, select
balance or fade and press and hold the AUDIO control.
The radio will beep once and will set the display level to
the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the AUDIO control when
tone or speaker controls are not active. The radio
will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear
on the display.
3-47
Using RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new
features. With RDS, the radio can do the following:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
which broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of
your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information
from these stations. These features will only work when
the RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name will appear on the display, instead of the
frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station
name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for
their current programming.
3-48
P-TYPE: This button is used to turn on and off
Program Type (PTY) selections. PTY and the light next
to the button will turn on. The last selected PTY will
appear on the display for five seconds.
Turn the TUNE RCL P-TYPE control to select the PTY
you want to listen to. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to
find radio stations for the PTY you want to listen to. The
last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear on the display. If both P-TYPE and
TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with
traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
To use the P-TYPE interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you
want to interrupt on. When you are listening to a compact
disc, the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play
if that selected program type format is broadcast.
AM FM: The AM FM button operates the alternate
frequency feature. Alternate frequency allows the radio
to switch to a stronger station with the same program
type. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn
alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the
display. The radio may switch to stronger stations.
Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn
alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Setting PTY Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite Program Types (PTYs). These buttons have
factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press P-TYPE, if it is not already on.
3. Turn the TUNE RCL P-TYPE control to
select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Radio Announcements
(Alert): Warns of national or local emergencies. You will
not be able to turn off alert announcements. ALERT!
appears on the display when an alert announcement plays.
When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio
station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player is
playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
INFO: If the current station has a message, INFO will
appear on the display. Press this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. To see the parts
of the message faster than every three seconds, press this
button again. A new group of words will appear on the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
INFO will disappear from the display until another new
message is received.
TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. The traffic announcement brackets will
appear on the display. TRAF will appear on the display
if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, the radio will seek to a station that
does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NONE FOUND will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
playing. If the compact disc player was being used, the
compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at
the point where it stopped.
3-49
Playing a Compact Disc
LOAD CD
: Press this button to load CDs into the
compact disc player. This compact disc player will
accommodate up to six discs.
To insert one disc do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD CD button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your disc,
it will be activated each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to
play automatically.
To insert multiple discs do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD CD button for two seconds.
You will then hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3-50
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load a
disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can then load another disc. The disc player takes
up to six discs. Do not try to load more than six.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a
number for each disc will be displayed. If you select
an EQ setting for your disc, it will be activated each
time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will
begin to play automatically.
4. To load more than one disc but less than six,
complete Steps 1, 2 and 3. When you have finished
loading discs, with the radio on or off, press the
LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play.
A small bar will appear under the CD number that is
playing, and the track number will appear.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact
Disc Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD
: This button will eject a disc or discs, if
you have multiple discs loaded. To eject a disc or discs
from the disc player perform one of the following steps:
D Press and release the LOAD CD eject button to eject
the disc that is currently playing, or
D to eject all of the discs, press the LOAD CD eject
button for two seconds, you will hear a beep, and
the light will flash to let you know when a disc is
being ejected.
When the LOAD CD eject button is pressed, the
receiver will eject the disc and REMOVE CD will be
displayed. You can now remove the disc. If the disc
is not removed, after 25 seconds, the disc will be
automatically pulled back into the receiver.
If you try to push the disc back into the receiver, before
the 25 second time period is complete, the receiver will
sense an error and will try to eject the disc several times
before stopping. Do not repeatedly press the LOAD CD
eject button to eject a disc after you have tried to push
it in manually. The receivers 25-second eject timer will
reset at each press of eject, which will cause the receiver
to not eject the disc until the 25-second time period
has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove the
disc. After removing the disc, press the VOLUME PWR
control off and then on again. This will clear the
disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into
the player again.
% REV: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show
elapsed time.
&
FWD : Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show
elapsed time.
3-51
RPT: With repeat, you can repeat one track or an entire
disc. To use repeat, do the following:
D To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
D To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and hold
the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will appear on
the display. Press RPT again to turn if off.
RDM: With random, you can listen to the tracks in
random, rather than sequential order, on all of the discs
or on one disc. To use random, do the following:
D Press and release the RDM button to play the tracks
on all of the discs that are loaded, in random order.
RDM will appear on the display. Press RDM to turn
it off.
D To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order, press and hold RDM for more than
two seconds. You will hear a beep and RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn
if off.
3-52
AUTO EQ: Press AUTO EQ to select the desired preset
equalization setting while playing a compact disc. The
equalization will be automatically set whenever you
play a compact disc. For more information on AUTO
EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section.
t
u
SEEK SCAN : To seek, press the left arrow while
playing a CD to go to the start of the current track, if
more than ten seconds have passed. Press the right arrow
to go to the next track. If you press the button more than
once, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the disc.
To scan one disc, press and hold either SEEK SCAN
arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. Use SEEK SCAN to
listen to each track of the currently selected disc for ten
seconds. The sound will mute while scanning. SCAN
will appear on the display. Press either SEEK SCAN
arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SEEK
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until DISC
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use
DISC SCAN to listen to the first track, for ten seconds
for each disc loaded. The sound will mute while
scanning to the next track. DISC SCAN will appear on
the display. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
TUNE RCL P-TYPE: Press this control to see how
long the current track has been playing. To change what
is normally shown on the display (track or elapsed
time), press the control until you see the display you
want, then hold the control until the display flashes.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player.
Using Song List Mode
The integrated 6-disc CD changer has a feature
called song list. This feature is capable of saving
20 track selections.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
or more seconds to save the track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of pressing SONG
LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to confirm
that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LIST
FULL will appear on the display.
To play the song list, press SONG LIST. One beep will
be heard and S-LIST will appear on the display.
To save tracks into SONG LIST perform the
following steps:
The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order that
they were saved.
1. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one
disc. See “LOAD CD” mentioned previously for
more information.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If
S-LIST is present, press SONG LIST to turn it off.
To delete tracks from SONG LIST perform the
following steps:
3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want to
save. The track will begin to play.
2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list on. S-LIST will
appear on the display.
1. Turn the disc player on.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
3-53
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When pressing SONG LIST one beep will
be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing
the SONG LIST button continuously, two beeps will
be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the tracks will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire SONG LIST perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list on. S-LIST will
appear on the display.
3. Press and hold SONG LIST for more than four
seconds. A beep will be heard, followed by two
beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be
heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song list
has been deleted.
3-54
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list.
To end SONG LIST mode, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be
removed from the display.
Compact Disc Messages
(Check CD): If this message appears on the
radio display, it could be due to one of the
following conditions:
D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.
D The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer when reporting the problem.
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
This feature is intended for rear seat passengers.
The following functions are controlled by the rear seat
audio system buttons:
PWR: Press this button to turn the rear seat audio
system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted when
the power is turned on unless you have a BoseR
equipped vehicle. You may operate the rear seat audio
functions even when the primary radio power is off.
VOL: Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and
counterclockwise to decrease volume. The left VOL
knob controls the left headphone and the right VOL
knob controls the right headphone.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the music sources including AM-FM, cassette tapes
or CDs and to use automatic tone control. The rear seat
passengers can only control the music sources that the
front seat passengers are not listening to. For example,
rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD
through headphones while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always override the rear
seat audio controls.
PROG: With a cassette tape in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a cassette tape. Press
PROG to switch between the tape and compact disc if
both are loaded. Press PROG again to return to the radio
when a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The
inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
SEEK: Press the SEEK button to tune to the next
station and stay there. The display will show your
selection. The sound will mute while seeking.
Press and hold the SEEK button to seek through
your preset radio stations set on your primary radio
pushbuttons. The display will show your selections.
3-55
The SEEK button is inactive if the AM FM mode on
the front radio is in use.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the SEEK button
to hear the next selection on the tape. Press and hold the
SEEK button to go to the other side of the tape. The
SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front
radio is in use.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, certain radio
functions can be
operated by using the
controls on your
steering wheel.
While listening to a CD, press the SEEK button to
hear the next selection on the CD. The SEEK button
is inactive if the CD mode on the front radio or the
CD changer is in use.
Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not
operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
AM/FM: Press this control to tune to the next radio
station. When playing a cassette tape or compact disc,
press AM/FM to switch to the radio.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed.
(Program): Press this control to tune to the next
preset radio station. When playing a cassette tape, press
program to hear the other side of a tape that is playing.
When using the CD changer, this control will seek to the
next selection.
With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.
(Volume): Press the up or down arrow to increase
or decrease volume.
3-56
Understanding Radio Reception
To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following:
AM
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-57
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
to indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette
to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this
other cassette has no improvement in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
3-58
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a broken tape detection
feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken
tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being
ejected, use the following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player with Radio Data System (RDS)
and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and a
cassette icon will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for five seconds.
READY will appear on the display and a cassette
icon will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken
tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the cassette
eject symbol or EJT button for five seconds to reset the
CLEAN indicator. The radio will display CLEANED to
show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
3-59
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Chime Level Adjustment
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
The volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can be
controlled by the radio. To change the volume level,
press and hold pushbutton six with the ignition on and
the radio power off. The chime volume level will change
from the normal level to loud, and LOUD will be
displayed on the radio. To change back to the default or
normal setting, press and hold pushbutton six again. The
chime level will change from the loud level to normal,
and NORMAL will be displayed.
3-60
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Traction Assist System (TAS)
(Two-Wheel Drive Only)
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
4-31
4-33
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-39
4-41
4-45
4-48
4-50
4-50
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment
Towing a Trailer
4-
4-1
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull
off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so
they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having
a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater;
at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is
an advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
This can help you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Traction Assist System (TAS)
(Two-Wheel Drive Only)
Your vehicle has a Traction Assist System (TAS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The LOW TRAC light next to the button will come on
when the TAS is limiting wheel spin. You may feel or
hear the system working, but this is normal.
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal and
doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration
in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of the
transmission or driving on rough roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
“Cruise Control” in the Index. When the TRAC OFF
light on the button is on, the TAS is off and will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-9
The TRAC OFF light on the button will come on under
the following conditions:
D The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off the
automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
D The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
D The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will
be on again. This is normal.
D A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System
or engine-related problem has been detected and the
vehicle needs service.
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, you should always leave the system
on. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to.
You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.
4-10
To turn the system
on or off press the
TAS on/off button
located near the shift
lever. If you used the
button to turn the
system off, the TRAC
OFF light on the
button will come
on and stay on.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The TRAC OFF light on the button
should go off.
If desired, you can change the TAS automatic engagement
feature so that the system will not come on automatically
when the engine is started. To do so:
Steering
1. Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the
transmission in PARK (P).
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
2. Turn the ignition to RUN; do not start the engine.
Power Steering
3. Apply the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal to
the floor and then press the TAS on/off button and
hold it down for at least six seconds.
Steering Tips
4. Release the TAS button and both pedals.
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the
TAS is set to come on automatically or not, you can
always turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS
on/off button.
Driving on Curves
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-11
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Traction Assist System” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want
it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-12
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-13
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross
a solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
4-14
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following
driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a
little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens
when the three control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal. If you have the “Traction Assist
System,” remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration
skid. If you do not have this system, or if the system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-15
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you
shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some
definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information
about your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are
the local laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll
be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with
law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
D Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
CAUTION:
D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
D
D
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can
be tossed about when driving over
rough terrain. You or your passengers
can be struck by flying objects. Secure
the cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
and low as possible.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.
4-17
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. Chevrolet recognizes these concerns and
urges every off-roader to follow these basic rules
for protecting the environment:
D Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
D Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning, breaking
down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or
over soft ground).
D Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-18
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn
of any blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control
your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some
things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:
D you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
D you have less time to react.
D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
D you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or
ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration
and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending
upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration,
poor traction and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can
startle you if you’re not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the
rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things
to consider:
D Is the path ahead clear?
D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)
D Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-19
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.
4-20
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across
a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
can’t do. There are some hills that simply can’t be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small
hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you
may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden
by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart
way to find out.
D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
D Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
D Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
4-21
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning
or sliding.
D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways,
and possibly roll over. You could be seriously
injured or killed. When driving up hills, always
try to go straight up.
4-22
D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you’re there.
D Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.
CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.
You could be seriously injured or killed. As you
near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
Q:
A:
What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
D If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
D If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need
to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
to PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
D As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough
to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you
to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it
up the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
4-23
Q:
A:
Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just can’t do it.
What should I do?
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
4-24
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P). This is because the NEUTRAL
position on the transfer case overrides the
transmission. You or someone else could be
injured. If you are going to leave your vehicle,
set the parking brake and shift the transmission
to PARK (P). But do not shift the transfer case
to NEUTRAL. Leave the transfer case in the
2 Wheel High, 4 High or 4 Low position.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:
D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
vehicle control?
D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a
hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed
under control.
4-25
Q:
Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
Q:
A:
Yes! These are important because if you
ignore them you could lose control and have
a serious accident.
D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
D When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
D Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-26
Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
Apply the parking brake.
D Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
D Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
D If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:
D A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go straight
up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
over end. But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width (the distance between
the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, don’t
drive across it. Find another route instead.
D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-27
Q:
What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the
path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
4-28
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.
CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and
your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle
on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.
4-29
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start
your engine. When you go through water, remember
that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer
to stop.
CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown.
If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away
the ground from under your tires, and you could
lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving through water.
4-30
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations
can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-31
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
4-32
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good
shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-33
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-34
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water, water can come in through
your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and the other vehicle occupants
could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs,
and otherwise be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth. See “Tires”
in the Index.
4-35
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start
to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-36
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
4-37
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
4-38
to the recommended pressure?
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let
it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise,
or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway
as an emergency.
4-39
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for information about
driving off-road.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and your vehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to
let your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
4-40
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
D
D
D
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
4-41
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will
need to be very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If you have traction assist, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off
if you ever need to. You should turn the system off if
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow.
See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index. Even though
your vehicle has a traction system, you’ll want to slow
down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
See “Traction Assist System” in the Index.
4-42
If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow.
4-43
Here are some things to do to summon help and keep
yourself and your passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-44
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle -- such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device know
as a “dolly”).
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
D What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
D How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions
on how far and how long they can tow.
D Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your
dealer or trailering professional for additional advice
and equipment recommendations.
D Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would
prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to
make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed.
See “Before Leaving on a Long Trip” in the Index.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-45
Dinghy Towing
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition off. To
prevent your battery from draining while towing,
remove the Ignition A and the Ignition B fuses from the
engine compartment fuse block. Be sure to reinstall the
fuse when you reach your destination. See “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive vehicles, should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles, they
should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground.
In rare cases when it’s unavoidable that a
two-wheel-drive vehicle is to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground, the propeller shaft to axle
yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller
shaft removed following the applicable service manual
removal/installation procedure.
Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission
through the opening created by removing the propeller
shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check
the transmission fluid level before driving the truck.
4-46
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
4. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N).
See “Four-Wheel Drive” in the Index for the
proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position
for your vehicle.
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be dolly towed. If you
need to tow your vehicle see “Dinghy Towing” earlier in
this section.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition off. This unlocks the steering
column and reduces battery drain as long as the
Ignition A and Ignition B fuses are removed.
Unlocking the steering column will allow the
proper movement of the front wheels and tires
during towing.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift
the transfer case into NEUTRAL.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
4-47
Loading Your Vehicle
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note the Certification/Tire label on
your truck or consult your dealer for additional details.
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch. The label shows the size of
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
4-48
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-49
Adding a Snow Plow or
Similar Equipment
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended for a
snow plow.
NOTICE:
Adding a snow plow or similar equipment to
your vehicle can damage it, and the repairs
wouldn’t be covered by warranty. Do not install a
snow plow or similar equipment on your vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the brakes may not work well -- or even at all.
You and your passengers could be seriously
injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed
all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-50
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that
of your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 4,000 lbs. (1 816 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 4,000 lbs. (1 816 kg). You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
D You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to,
a lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the life of
your transmission.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-51
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer
weight for your vehicle.
2WD
Axle
Ratio
3.42
3.73
4.10
4WD
3.42
3.73
4.10
4-52
Max.
Trailer Wt.
5,400 lbs.
(2 449 kg)
5,900 lbs.
(2 676 kg)
6,400 lbs.
(2 903 kg)
5,200 lbs.
(2 359 kg)
5,700 lbs.
(2 585 kg)
6,200 lbs.
(2 812 kg)
GCWR *
10,000 lbs.
(4 535 kg)
10,500 lbs.
(4 762 kg)
11,000 lbs.
(4 989 kg)
10,000 lbs.
(4 535 kg)
10,500 lbs.
(4 762 kg)
11,000 lbs.
(4 989 kg)
* The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment
and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door
or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you
don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue
weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceed the
maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 816 kg), be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch
and sway control of the proper size. This equipment
is very important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling when you’re driving.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index. Dirt and water can, too.
4-53
Safety Chains
Trailer Brakes
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by
the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
D The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa)
of pressure.
D The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing
for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
4-54
Driving with a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can’t
see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness
or death. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
D Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
D Keep the rear-most windows closed.
D If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
recirculation because it only recirculates
the air inside your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly
as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to
be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check
your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
4-55
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond
the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move
your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone guide you.
4-56
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t
shift down, you might have to use your brakes so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
get the overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
4-57
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your
wheels away from the curb. When parking downhill,
turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4-58
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic
Transfer Case)” in the Index.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
D start your engine,
D shift into a gear, and
D release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid
(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling
system and brake system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-59
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector that is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform. The seven-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Running Lamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric
trailer brake controller. These wires are located inside
the vehicle on driver’s side under the instrument
panel. These wires should be connected to an electric
trailer brake controller by your dealer or a qualified
service center.
4-60
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-9
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-11
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-32
Cooling System
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
The button for the
hazard warning flashers
is located on top of the
steering column.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button all the way down to make your front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. To turn off
the flashers, press the button again until it clicks and
then release it.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
5-2
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. But please use the following steps to
do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or
jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks
clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when
there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and
a cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-3
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
5-4
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets (if equipped). Turn
off the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This
will avoid sparks and help to save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (-) jump
starting terminal. You should always use this remote
terminal instead of the terminal on the battery.
The remote negative (-) terminal is located on the
front engine lift bracket and is marked “GND.”
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index
for more information on location.
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight
if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too. And don’t connect the negative (-)
cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
5-5
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
5-6
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of
the good battery. Use a
remote negative (-)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. The remote negative (-) terminal on your
vehicle is located on the front engine lift bracket and
is marked “GND.”
9. Connect the other end of
the negative (-) cable to
the remote negative (-)
terminal on the vehicle
with the dead battery.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
NOTICE:
Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical
shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly.
To prevent electrical shorting, take care that
they don’t touch each other or any other metal.
The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
5-7
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Towing Your Vehicle
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (-) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (-) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-8
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” and “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in
the Index.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Gages” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could
be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-9
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D
D
D
D
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).
5-10
If you no longer have the overheat warning,
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When the engine is cold,
the coolant level should
be at least up to the
FULL COLD mark.
If it isn’t, you may have a
leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
CAUTION:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-11
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOLR engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if
the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed
is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it
doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
5-12
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
5-13
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap
when the cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-14
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
5-15
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-16
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions
the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading,
trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases when the clutch engages. So you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
5-17
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-18
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the
other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under
the rear seat of the vehicle. See “Rear Seats” in the
Index for more information on accessing the jacking
equipment under the rear seat.
5-19
The tools you’ll be using include the wheel wrench (A),
tire blocks (B), extension (socket end) (C), handle
(jack end) (D), and jack (E).
The following instructions explain how to remove the
spare tire mounted underneath your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Never remove or restow a tire from/to a stowage
position under the vehicle while the vehicle is
supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire fully
against the underside of the vehicle when restowing.
5-20
1. To remove the underbody-mounted spare, insert the
socket end of the extension, on an angle, into the
hole in the rear bumper. Be sure the socket end of
the extension connects into the hoist shaft.
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench
until the spare tire can be pulled out from under
the vehicle.
3. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not
to lower. See “Secondary Latch System” later in
this section.
When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through
the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under
the vehicle.
NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive the
vehicle before the cable is properly stored.
4. Use the chisel end of the wheel wrench to pry off
the center cap.
See “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire” later in this section to continue changing
the flat tire.
5-21
Secondary Latch System
The spare tire hoist assembly is equipped with a
secondary latch system. It’s designed to stop the spare
tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle. For the
secondary latch to work, the spare tire must be stored
with the valve stem pointing up. See “Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index for instructions on
storing the spare tire correctly.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch
do the following:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible.
CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure, read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
5-22
2. If it is not visible, proceed to Step 6.
If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 2 of “Removing the Spare Tire and Tools”
earlier in this section.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare tire
is balancing on the jack.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
CAUTION:
6. Attach the jack handle, extension and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position the
center lift point of the jack under the center of the
spare tire.
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
5-23
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
11. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
12. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, return to Step 2
of “Removing the Spare Tire and Tools” earlier in
this Section.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the jack handle, extension and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper, on an angle,
and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare the rest of the way.
5-24
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
raise the jack lift head.
3. Place the handle, extension and wheel wrench onto
the jack.
5-25
Front
Rear
A. Frame
B. Jack
C. Handle
5-26
D. Extension
E. Wheel Wrench
4. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest the
flat tire.
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is
enough room for the spare tire to fit.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-27
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
5-28
9. Put the nuts on by hand.
Make sure the rounded
end is toward the wheel.
10. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand,
use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon
as possible.
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
12. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification.
5-29
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire or flat
road tire needs to be stored with the valve stem
pointing up. If the tire is stored with its valve
stem pointing downward, its secondary latch
won’t work properly, and the spare tire or flat
road tire could loosen and suddenly fall from
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-30
CAUTION: (Continued)
your vehicle. If this happened when your vehicle
was being driven, the tire might contact a
person or another vehicle, causing injury and,
of course, damage to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare or flat road tire is
stored with its valve stem pointing up.
NOTICE:
An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always
be stored under the vehicle with the hoist.
However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the appearance of the
wheel. To avoid this, always stow the wheel
properly with the valve stem pointing up and
have the tire repaired as soon as possible.
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted spare.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until
the tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare
tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed up and to the rear.
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
3. Put the socket end of the extension, on an angle,
through the hole in the rear bumper and into the
hoist shaft.
5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and
then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
5-31
Return the jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the
proper location under the rear seat of the vehicle. Secure
the items and return the rear seat to its proper position.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
CAUTION:
A. Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
5-32
C. Extension
D. Wheel Blocks
and Jack
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
NOTICE:
Using the Recovery Hooks
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after
a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can
use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you
do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your
vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where
you can continue driving.
5-33
CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The
hooks could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.
5-34
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-8
6-11
6-16
6-18
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear Axle
Four-Wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-38
6-46
6-47
6-49
6-50
6-54
6-55
6-55
6-56
6-63
6-63
6-63
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it is bad
enough, it can damage your engine. A little pinging
noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered
normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or
that a higher-octane fuel is necessary.
6-3
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers’ Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasolines.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the
Index) and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
In Canada, look for
the “Auto Makers’
Choice” label on
the pump.
Canada Only
6-4
Additives
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available
in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your
fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you’ll be driving.
6-5
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap by the tether using
the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of your vehicle.
6-6
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Gasoline can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If
you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp
to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See “Malfunction Indicator
Lamp” in the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-8
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood, first
pull the handle located
inside the vehicle on the
lower driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer
and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
There may be a lamp that comes on when you open
the hood.
6-9
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood you’ll see the following:
6-10
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
Engine Oil
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check your
engine oil level right away. For more information,
see “Check Oil Level Message” in the Index.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Indicator
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
You should check your engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking Engine Oil
H. Radiator Pressure Cap
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap
J. Front Engine Lift Bracket Marked “GND”
K. Brake Master Cylinder
L. Battery
M. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from its slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then pull the
hood down firmly to close. It will latch when dropped
from 6 to 8 inches (15 to 20 cm) without pressing on
the hood.
The engine oil dipstick
handle is a yellow ring
located in the engine
compartment toward the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See “Engine
Compartment Overview”
in the Index for more
information on location.
6-11
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the L mark, then you’ll need to
add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
6-12
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the F mark
that shows the proper operating range, your
engine could be damaged.
The engine oil fill cap
is located in the engine
compartment toward the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See “Engine
Compartment Overview”
in the Index for more
information on location.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own
oil, be sure you use oil that
has the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil
container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-13
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is best for
your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s
going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
_
_
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil
can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
6-14
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when
to change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage,
but on engine revolutions and engine operating
temperature. When the computer has calculated that
the oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System
will indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage
between oil and filter changes will vary depending
on how you drive your vehicle -- usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
since your last oil and filter change. Under severe
conditions, the system may come on before 3,000 miles
(5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months (whichever
occurs first) without an oil change.
t
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you
drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil
and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner.
Remember to reset the CHANGE ENG OIL light
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the CHANGE ENG OIL Light
What to Do with Used Oil
To reset the CHANGE ENG OIL light,
do the following:
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
If the CHANGE ENG OIL light flashes for
five seconds, the system is reset. If the light does
not flash, repeat the procedure.
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing
oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of
oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If you have a problem properly disposing of your used
oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-15
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter
is located toward the front
of the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
The engine air cleaner/filter
assembly has an indicator
that lets you know when the
air filter is dirty and needs
to be serviced. The indicator
is located on the engine
air cleaner/filter air duct.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index
for more information on engine air cleaner/filter
indicator location.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on engine air cleaner/filter location.
The service window (A) with the percentage scale
shows the amount of engine air cleaner/filter life used.
When both service window (A) and service window (B)
turn orange, replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6-16
After changing the engine air cleaner/filter, press the
button on top of the indicator to reset it.
See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index to
determine when to check the indicator.
To replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Remove the three screws on the engine air
cleaner/filter and lift off the cover.
2. Twist out the old engine air cleaner/filter and replace
it with a new one.
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
3. Reinstall the cover.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
6-17
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
NOTICE:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if
you check your transmission fluid.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter
every 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
D
D
D
D
6-18
When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F
(82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F
(10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50_F (10_C) or more. If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
6-19
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
Locate the handle with the
transmission and lock
symbols for the automatic
transmission dipstick in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
3. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
See “Engine Compartment Overview”
in the Index for more information on location.
How to Add Fluid
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-20
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
How to Check Lubricant
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRONR-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-21
Four-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-22
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
6-23
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:
D
D
D
D
D
Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
6-24
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by
the use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-25
Adding Coolant
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
recovery tank is in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
See “Engine
Compartment
Overview” in
the Index for
more information
on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm,
the level should be at the base of the filler neck or a
little higher.
6-26
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see “Cooling System” in the Index.
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
information on location.
6-27
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the C (cold) mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper
fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See “Engine Compartment Overview”
in the Index for reservoir location.
6-28
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for reservoir location.
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until
the tank is full.
D
D
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
6-29
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes
won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up.
6-30
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
6-31
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
D
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care”
in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-32
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in -- be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your
brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes
can change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways
if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
6-33
Battery
Vehicle Storage
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for battery location.
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-34
Bulb Replacement
For the type of bulbs, see “Replacement Bulbs” in
the Index.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Taillamps and Rear Turn Signals
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws
from the lamp assembly.
4. Unclip the wiring harness (A) and remove the three
socket retaining screws (B).
5. Remove the socket by releasing the retaining tabs.
6. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it from
the socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
8. Reinstall the socket and screws.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
9. Reconnect the wiring harness.
10. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
11. Close the liftgate.
6-35
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.
See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index for the proper type of replacement blade.
NOTICE:
Use care when removing or installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the
arm to fall back and strike the windshield.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
6-36
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
A. Claw in Notch
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade claws (A).
Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the
opposite end (B). The plastic caps (C) will be forced off
as the insert is fully inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
6-37
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement” in this
section for instructions on how to change the backglass
wiper blade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock
in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade,
so care should be used when pulling it away from
the vehicle.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.
6-38
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the driver’s
door edge, above the door latch, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at
least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-39
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance
Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
6-40
When It’s Time for New Tires
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you
can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
6-41
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look at the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-42
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
same size and type tires on all wheels.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires
by treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-43
Temperature -- A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-44
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use
the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous.
You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s
been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an
accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
6-45
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-46
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Here are some cleaning tips:
D
D
D
D
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-47
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer
for this product.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
Cleaning Leather
4. Let dry.
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
dealer for this product.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6-48
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because
they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals
on the inside rear window, since they may have
to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are
used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached
across the defogger grid.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
6-49
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth at least every six months.
During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-50
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry
on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with
a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that
are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull
the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
6-51
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Cleaning Tires
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
6-52
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner,
the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
6-53
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
6-54
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
D
D
D
D
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
6-55
Electrical System
Headlamps
Add-On Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses. An
electrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off.
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
6-56
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker
and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice,
the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is
caused by some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band
is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
The fuse block is located under the hood in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,
push in and turn the fastener clockwise.
6-57
6-58
Mini Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Usage
ECAS
Passenger’s Side
High-Beam Headlamp
Passenger’s Side
Low-Beam Headlamp
Back-Up Trailer Lamps
Driver’s Side
High-Beam Headlamp
Driver’s Side
Low-Beam Headlamp
WASH
ATC
Windshield Wipers
Powertrain Control Module B
Fog Lamps
ST/LP
Cigarette Lighter
COILS
RIDE
TBD -- Ignition 1
Mini Fuses
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
50
51
52
Usage
Crank
Air Bag
ELEK Brake
Cooling Fan
Horn
Ignition E
ETC
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
Automatic Shift Lock
Control System
ENG 1
Back-Up
Powertrain Control Module 1
Oxygen Sensor
Air Conditioning
TBC
Passenger’s Side Trailer TRN
Driver’s Side Trailer TRN
Hazard Flashers
6-59
J-Case Fuses
32
33
34
35
36
Micro Relays
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Solid
State Relays
45
46
6-60
Usage
Trailer
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Ignition A
Blower Motor
Ignition B
Usage
Mini Relay
Usage
47
Starter
Miscellaneous
Usage
48
49
Instrument Panel Battery
Fuse Puller
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Blank
Rear Window Washer
Fog Lamps
Horn
Fuel Pump
Windshield Wipers/Washer
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Usage
Cooling Fan
HDM
The rear underseat fuse block is located under the rear
seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Fuse
Usage
01
Right Door Control Module
02
Left Door Control Module
03
LGM 2
04
TBC 3
05
Rear Fog Lamps
06
LGM/DSM
07
TBC 2
08
Power Seats
09
Blank
10
DDM
11
AMP
12
PDM
13
Rear Climate Controls
14
Left Rear Parking Lamps
15
Auxiliary Power 2
16
VEH CHMSL
6-61
Fuse
6-62
Usage
Fuse
Usage
17
Right Rear Parking Lamps
36
HVAC B
18
LOCKS
37
Front Parking Lamps
19
Blank
38
Left Turn Signal
20
Sunroof
39
HVAC 1
21
LOCK
40
TBC 4
23
Blank
41
Radio
24
UNLOCK
42
TR PARK
25
Blank
43
Right Turn Signal
26
Blank
44
HVAC
45
Rear Fog Lamps
27
OH Battery/OnStarR System
29
Rainsense Wipers
46
Auxiliary Power 1
30
Parking Lamps
47
Ignition 0
31
TBC 4CC
48
Four-Wheel Drive
32
TBC5
49
Blank
33
Front Wipers
50
TBC IG
34
VEH STOP
51
Brakes
35
Blank
52
TBC RUN
Replacement Bulbs
Lamps
Number
Tail and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications
Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4200
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6
VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-3-6-2-4
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.050 inches (1.25 mm)
Wheel and Tires
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
Capacities
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9 quarts (13.1 L)
Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.0 quarts (6.6 L)
Transmission
(Drain and Refill) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Differential Fluid
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 pints (1.9 L)
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 pints (0.8 L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7 U.S. gallons (75.7 L)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to
fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF59*
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2014C*
Automatic Transmission
Filter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GM Part No. 24200796
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-965*
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF831*
Windshield Wiper Blade . . . . . 20.0 inches (50.8 cm)
Backglass Wiper Blade . . . . . . 14.0 inches (35.6 cm)
*ACDelcoR part number
6-63
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-15
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Scheduled Maintenance
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7-20
7-22
7-25
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
7-2
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for
you to record and keep track of the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle
for warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
D are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See
“Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle” in the Index.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.
7-5
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM
Oil Life System (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system. The system will show
you when to change the oil -- usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the
indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 12,000 miles
(20 000 km) or 12 months without an oil and
filter change.
t
7-6
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE
ENG OIL light appears. Remember to reset the Oil Life
System when the oil and filter have been changed.
See “Oil Life System” in the Index for information
on resetting.
An Emission Control Service.
Scheduled Maintenance
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance
7-8
Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-9
Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Replace fuel filter.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-10
Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
j Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace fuel filter.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-12
Scheduled Maintenance
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-13
Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
j Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-14
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the
Index for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the
Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
7-15
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
7-16
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check
of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the
spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrench/ratchet to tighten the cable. See “Storing the
Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
Indicator Check
Your vehicle has an indicator located on the air cleaner
in the engine compartment that lets you know when the
air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed. Check
indicator at least twice a year or when your engine oil is
changed, whichever occurs first. See “Air Cleaner” in
the Index for more information. Inspect your air cleaner
filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is
used in dusty areas or under off road conditions.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. A fluid
loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and
repair if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment
hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot points, rear door
detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot
points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge,
locks and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to
use. More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-17
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn
off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
7-18
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
D The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-19
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
7-20
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once
a year.
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals, check
front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when
necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check
and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent hose at
transfer case for kinks and proper installation. More
frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
7-21
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
7-22
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or
HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
USAGE
Hydraulic
Brake System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
GM OptikleenR Washer
Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Power
Steering System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Key
Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Rear Driveline
Center
Spline and
Universal Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Constant
Velocity
Universal Joint
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Front and
Rear Axle
Automatic
Transfer Case
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12378261) or
equivalent meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(GM Part No. 12378508).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
7-23
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Liftgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seats
and Fuel
Door Hinge
Outer
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points
and Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).
7-24
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-25
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-26
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-27
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-28
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-29
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-30
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-8
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
8-8
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot
be resolved by the dealership without further help,
contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should
file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it
and proceed with any other venue for relief available
to you.
8-3
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
8-4
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR (243-8872)
From:
Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-5
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to
a nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free; however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
Roadside Basic Care provides:
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2002 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
8-6
D Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
D Free towing for warranty repairs
D Basic over-the-phone technical advice
D Available dealer services at reasonable costs
(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
Roadside Courtesy Care provides:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 2002 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2002 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services
must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies
that will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will
explain any payment obligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services.
8-7
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
8-8
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle
ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to
a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
8-9
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE UNITED
STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-11
2002 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2002 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2002 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
8-12
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
www.helminc.com
2
0
0
2
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
2002
$120.00
2002
$50.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
2002
$20.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
2002
$15.00
TOTAL
PRICE
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(STATE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(ZIP CODE)
(
)
AREA CODE
GM-CHE-ORD99
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)
MasterCard
VISA
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers–1
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
$6.50
Canadian customers
add $3.00 to U.S.
order processing
GRAND TOTAL
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-13